JP2023129517A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of making behaviours of game balls excellent.SOLUTION: A game area is provided with a first through-gate 35. The first through-gate 35 is provided as an opening which game balls B1 flowing down in the game area can enter. The game area is provided with an adjustment mechanism 620 capable of guiding the game balls B1 to the first through-gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 620 is provided with an outlet 621 capable of discharging the game balls B1. The outlet 621 is provided for the adjustment mechanism 620 in the mode which allows the game balls B1 discharged from the outlet 621 to reach the first through-gate 35. In the game area, the adjustment mechanism 620 is installed at a position that allows the game balls B1 discharged from the outlet 621 to reach the first through-gate 35 when they flow down for a distance equal to or larger than a diameter of the game balls B1.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area where game balls flow down, and the game board includes nails and windmills to appropriately disperse the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special winning winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls fired from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while coming into contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, actuation opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are fired. A game ball is paid out to a player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-146319

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to play the game in a suitable manner, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows games to be played suitably.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a gaming value assigning means electrically connected to a predetermined detection means and executing a process for assigning a gaming value to a game;
processing execution means that is electrically connected to the gaming value imparting means and executes a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information that is information used in the processing for imparting the gaming value and is referred to in response to the detection by the predetermined detection means;
Reference information stored in the first reference information storage means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before execution of a predetermined process for advancing the game is started. first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the processing execution means;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means to the processing execution means;
means for waiting for the processing to proceed until a predetermined period has elapsed after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine has started;
Equipped with
The processing execution means includes:
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the gaming value assigning means;
Execution means for executing the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
processing result information storage means for storing processing result information that is information regarding the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means;
Equipped with
The game value imparting means is a main control means that controls the progress of the game,
The processing execution means is an effect control means that controls execution of an effect,
The first transmitting means transmits the reference information signal to the processing execution means after the predetermined period has elapsed,
The present invention is characterized in that, when a predetermined event that stops game progress control occurs, the predetermined control for transmitting the predetermined information signal by the second transmitting means is not executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably play a game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. It is a front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism in an enlarged manner. (a) It is a front view and a right side view of a rotary body separated from an adjustment mechanism, and (b) It is a front view and a top view of the said rotary body. It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut directly above the intake port on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board. (a), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to explain the movement of the game ball taken into the adjustment mechanism. (a), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to explain the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and entering the first through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism showing the movement of the game ball being discharged from the adjustment mechanism and coming off the first through gate. (a) A cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut directly above the intake port on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board; (b) A cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first blade part, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut directly above the intake port on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. (a) A low-frequency winning determination value table showing the winning determination value for the general electricity release lottery in the low-frequency support mode, and (b) a high-frequency winning determination value table showing the winning determination value for the general electricity release lottery in the high-frequency support mode. This is a winning determination value table for (a) to (c) are time charts showing the timing at which a general power open winning can occur in a comparison pachinko machine. (a) to (d) are time charts showing timings at which a general power open election may occur; 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing an open counter update process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process on the general map side performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the regular pattern fluctuation start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the general electricity release lottery process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern determination process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which a detection result of a ball entry detection sensor is input to a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory; 3 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. It is a front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism in a second embodiment in an enlarged manner. (a) is a plan view of the housing cut away directly above the adjustment mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the housing enlarged and shown around the rotation axis. FIG. 6 is a front view of the rotating body separated from the adjustment mechanism. (a) It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut directly above the distribution nail on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (b) it is ejected from the adjustment mechanism and enters the first through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball, and (c) a cross section of the window panel and the game board when cut directly above the distribution nail on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (d) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and comes off the first through gate. (a) to (d) are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of game balls that are taken into the adjustment mechanism and transported; (a) to (c) are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball near the intake port. It is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of an adjustment mechanism in a third embodiment. (a) It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the electric nail in the permitted position, and (b) It is a front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the electric nail in the prohibited position in an enlarged manner. (a) to (c) are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. (a) to (c) are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain how the game ball is released from being caught in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (a) to (d) are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to explain the movement of the game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and enters the first through gate. (a), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to explain the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and coming off the first through gate. It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism in the fifth embodiment. (a) It is a front view of the adjustment device in a closed state, and (b) It is a front view of the adjustment device in an open state. (a) to (d) are front views of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board in a 6th embodiment. (a), (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a second operating port. (a) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the state seen from the side of the prize distribution device, and (b) It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the state seen from the back side of the prize distribution device. It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in an eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory; FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by a management CPU in the tenth embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process performed by the main side CPU in 11th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process performed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process performed by the main side CPU in 12th Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by a management CPU in the thirteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in a fifteenth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of an MPU of a main control device in a sixteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device in a seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU. FIG. 12 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and management IC in the eighteenth embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure within the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. have The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front and back direction. Each opening includes a general winning opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a first through gate 35, a second through gate 39, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, and a general winning opening. A drawing unit 38 and the like are provided respectively. A total of four general winning holes 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) symbols. The symbol display device 41 includes a display surface 41a that displays effects, and is arranged in an opening 24c provided in the game board 24 in order to make the display surface 41a visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. There is. Further, a center frame 57 is disposed in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper part of the center frame 57 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and provides a configuration that does not cause problems such as reduced visibility of the display screen due to the fall of the game ball B1. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the center frame 57 includes a roof unit 58 provided so as to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 24c. The game board 24 includes a game area PA on both the left and right sides of the center frame 57.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and these inner rail portions 25 and outer rail portions 26 allow the game ball to be A guide rail is configured to guide B1. A game ball B1 fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, and a ball that supplies game balls B1 stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the firing rail 27a. It is equipped with a feeding device 27b and a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator that fires the game ball B1 supplied onto the firing rail 27a toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball B1 is fired. By adjusting the amount of rotation in the rotation operation, the player can shoot the game ball B1 aiming at the gaming area PA on the left side of the center frame 57, and also aiming at the gaming area PA on the right side of the center frame 57. The game ball B1 can be fired.

As shown in FIG. 3, even if a ball enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39, the game ball B1 is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, if one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34. In this case, one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and the special electric winning ball is paid out. When one game ball B1 enters the device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls B1 that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls B1, and various members such as a windmill are also provided.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball B1 passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball B1 is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball B1 passes through the game area PA after passing through the opening. This also includes a mode in which the water continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball B1 into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the first The entry of the game ball B1 into the through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 is also expressed as winning.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball B1 cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball B1 can enter the second operating port 34.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57, a first through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball B1. The first through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has entered the first through gate 35 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are disposed. It is possible to win either one.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the gaming area PA on the right side of the center frame 57, a second through gate 39 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball B1. . The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the second through gate 39 in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that wins the prize in the second through gate 39 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and the game ball B1 enters the second through gate 39 and reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided. It is possible to win either one.

Based on winnings in the through gates 35 and 39, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, a general power opening lottery, which is a lottery, is held with winnings in the through gates 35 and 39 as a trigger, and a general power distribution lottery is held in the lower left corner of the gaming area PA, which is an area through which the game ball B1 does not pass. A variable display of the picture is performed on the common figure display section 38a of the figure unit 38. Then, when the result of the general electricity release lottery is a general electricity release winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general electricity grid display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electricity release state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the through gates 35 and 39, the general electric accessory 34a is intermittently opened to support winning to the second actuating port 34, in a low frequency support mode. And, a high-frequency support mode is set in which the general electric utility object 34a is opened in a manner that makes it easier for the game ball B1 to enter the second operating port 34 than in the low-frequency support mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, in the low-frequency support mode in which the transition to the high-frequency support mode is not performed, an effect is performed in such a manner that the player is made to aim at the left gaming area PA where the first through gate 35 is provided. It will be done. When the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, an effect is performed in which the player is made to aim at the right side gaming area PA where the second through gate 39 is provided. Details of the low frequency support mode and high frequency support mode will be described later.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls B1 that have entered the through gates 35, 39 is reserved up to a maximum of 4, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the regular figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is performed using a prize winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls B1 entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34, the symbol is changed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and in each symbol row, a main character numbered from "1" to "9" is set. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scrolling display for all symbol rows is first started, and then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally a predetermined display is displayed in each symbol row. The process ends with the symbol displayed statically. For example, in a game round where the game result is a jackpot, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display performance triggered by winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. be exposed. In addition, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, the display starts on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the period from displaying a predetermined result to ending is one game round. equivalent to times. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on winning to the first operating port 33 or winning to the second operating port 34, a transition is made to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 is possible. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot win a prize, and if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the lottery, it is switched to the open state in which the game ball B1 can win a prize. It looks like this. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 3, an adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35 to adjust the timing at which game balls B1 are supplied toward the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 180 supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 by discharging the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 below. The interval between the adjustment mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is such that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or more than the diameter of the game ball B1. . The adjustment mechanism 180 will be explained below.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 4, the adjustment mechanism 180 includes a rotating body 183 that takes in the game ball B1 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 and transports it to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, and an adjustment drive that rotates the rotating body 183 clockwise. 184, and an accommodating part 181 that accommodates the rotating body 183 and prevents the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 183 by the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation from being thrown out before the ejection position.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rotating body 183 is provided at the center of the adjustment mechanism 180. The rotating body 183 is formed by providing four concave portions 183b to 183e into which the game ball B1 can be taken into a transparent resin member having a substantially disk shape whose diameter is reduced toward the rear. ing. 5(a) is a front view and a right side view of the rotating body 183, and FIG. 5(b) is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are formed so as to be recessed from the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183 toward the axis. The recesses 183b to 183e are arranged in the order of first recess 183b → second recess 183c → third recess 183d → fourth recess 183e in the rotational direction so that their centers are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. It is formed so that

As shown in FIG. 5(a), none of the recesses 183b to 183e reach the axis of the rotating body 183, and are discontinuous with each other. Each of the recesses 183b to 183e has a shape and size that allows the entirety of one game ball B1 to fit therein. In each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the inner wall near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 has an inclination such that the recessed portions 183b to 183e become wider toward the outer edge, and the width of each recessed portion 183b to 183e near the outer edge is It is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the rotating body 183 includes a first blade portion 188 sandwiched between a fourth recessed portion 183e and a first recessed portion 183b, and a first recessed portion 183b and a second recessed portion 183c. The second blade part 189 is sandwiched between the second blade part 189, the third blade part 190 is sandwiched between the second recessed part 183c and the third recessed part 183d, and the third blade part 190 is sandwiched between the third recessed part 183d and the fourth recessed part 183e. A fourth blade portion 191 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the adjustment mechanism 180, the storage section 181 that accommodates the rotating body 183 is configured so that the game ball B1 taken into each of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is moved from the front side of the game board 24 during transportation. It also includes a base body 181a that prevents it from moving backward. The base body 181a includes a fixing flange 181b formed to protrude in the radial direction from the outer periphery of the base body 181a.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 taken along a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24 just above the intake port 185. In order to explain the configuration of the accommodating portion 181, FIG. 6 shows a state in which the rotating body 183 is removed. As shown in FIG. 6, the front surface of the game board 24 is formed with a fixing recess 24d that can accommodate the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b. As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 is fixed to the game board 2 by screwing the fixing flange 181b in a state where the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b are accommodated in the fixing recess 24d (FIG. 6). is fixed. The base body 181a is located behind the rotating body 183, and the front surface of the base body 181a is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24.

As shown in FIG. 4, an accommodation space for accommodating the rotating body 183 is formed in front of the base body 181a, and the rotating body 183 is accommodated in the accommodation space. An adjustment drive unit 184 is arranged behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive section 184 includes an output shaft 184a that extends forward from the front surface of the adjustment drive section 184 in a manner perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. The rotating body 183 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating body 183 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive section 184.

The adjustment drive section 184 is connected to an output port of an MPU 62 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. When the drive signal is supplied and the adjustment drive unit 184 is brought into a driving state, the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° for 1 sec. A stepping motor is used as the adjustment drive unit 184, and specifically, a 1-2 phase excitation drive in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed is adopted. Note that the phase excitation method is not limited to this, and other phase excitation methods may be adopted. The adjustment drive unit 184 has a configuration in which the output shaft rotates once when the excitation signal is transmitted for 500 pulses from the main controller 60, and the angle change based on one pulse of the excitation signal, that is, the angle change per step is It is 0.72°.

As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 includes upright walls 181c and 181d for partitioning the accommodating space. The accommodation space is divided by upright walls 181c and 181d to be one size larger than the rotating body 183. The distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the upright walls 181c and 181d of the accommodating part 181 is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of each blade part 188 to 191, and the distance between these two distances is The difference is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 enters between the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of each of the blade parts 188 to 191 and the upright walls 181c and 181d is eliminated.

A plurality of upright walls 181c and 181d are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 181a. Among the plurality of standing walls 181c and 181d, the left standing wall 181c existing on the left side and the right standing wall 181d existing on the right side are spaced apart in the lateral direction, so that the upper part of the accommodating part 181 An intake port 185 is present.

As shown in FIG. 4, the shape and size of the intake port 185 are such that one game ball B1 can pass through the intake port 185, and a plurality of game balls B1 can simultaneously pass through the intake port 185. It is set so that it is impossible to pass through the port 185. Therefore, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game balls B1 one by one from the intake port 185.

The left standing wall 181c prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side of the intake port 185 from entering the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180. Therefore, the game ball B1 is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e that open toward the left, and the game ball B1 is conveyed for a long time in the order of the upper part → right part → lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, and then is ejected. It never happens. In addition, the right side upright wall 181d is moved outward of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the centrifugal force of the rotating body 183 before the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 and reaches the discharge timing. prevent being thrown out.

As shown in FIG. 4, the left standing wall 181c and the right standing wall 181d are spaced apart in the lateral direction, so that the housing portion 181 is opened downward. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has been taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 located below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 includes a discharge protrusion 181e for discharging the game balls B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at a predetermined discharge position. The discharge protrusion 181e is provided near the bottom of the center of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 6, the ejection protrusion 181e protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 181a to a midway position in the game area PA so that the protrusion dimension is 9 mm.

As already explained, the length dimension in the front-rear direction of the game area PA (FIG. 3) sandwiched between the front surface of the game board 24 and the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is 18 mm, and the length of the game ball B1 is 18 mm. The diameter of is 11 mm. For this reason, the ejection protrusion 181e allows the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA (game board 24 side), and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA (window panel 52 side), It has a length dimension in the front and rear direction that allows contact with both. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181e is formed to extend downward from near the bottom of the center of the base body 181a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the lower end of the discharge protrusion 181e is the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191 (FIG. 5(a)). shorter than the distance. Further, as shown in FIG. 5(a), a collision avoidance groove 192 is provided in the first blade part 188 and the third blade part 190 of the rotating body 183 to avoid collision with the discharge protrusion 181e. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the second blade part 189 and the fourth blade part 191 are also provided with collision avoidance grooves 192 for avoiding collision with the discharge protrusion 181e.

The collision avoidance groove 192 is provided larger than the protrusion dimension of the ejection protrusion 181e, and does not come into contact with the rotating body 183 no matter what rotational state the ejection protrusion 181e is in. Therefore, the discharge protrusion 181e does not hinder the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181e includes a right side surface 181g for discharge, which is inclined downwardly and to the left. The right side surface 181g for ejection comes into contact with the game ball B1 present in the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the ejection position of the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180. After the game ball B1 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, it is ejected toward the first through gate 35 at the bottom when it comes into contact with the ejection right side surface 181g.

When the game ball B1 is ejected directly downward from the adjustment mechanism 180, it enters a first through gate 35 located below without colliding with any obstacle on the way. As already explained, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the distance from the ejection position to the first through gate 35 is greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball B1, depending on the ejection direction and ejection speed of the game ball B1 at the ejection position, the ejected game ball B1 may be removed from the first through gate 35. There is a possibility that it will come off. The discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is fixed by the discharge protrusion 181e, and the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is short. Therefore, when the ejected game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, the adjustment mechanism 180 ejects the game ball B1 until the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35. The time falls within a predetermined range.

Since the discharge timing of the game ball B1 occurs in the adjustment mechanism 180 at a cycle of 1 sec, the winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 also occurs at a cycle of approximately 1 sec. Details of the flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described later.

The rotating body 183 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 185 is present in the recesses 183b to 183e, thereby directing the game ball B1 toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. transport.

The adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 flowing down from above when any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is open upward. By configuring the inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 to have a shape that becomes wider toward the outer edge, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 at the intake port 185. period can be extended. Thereby, the number of game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 can be increased, and the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 can be increased.

Furthermore, by configuring the rotating body 183 to have a plurality of recesses 183b to 183e, it is possible to reduce the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 necessary for ejecting the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 at a cycle of 1 sec. I can do it. In this way, by slowly rotating the rotating body 183, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be taken into the concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183.

Here, the configuration around the adjustment mechanism 180 on the game board 24 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of nails 24b are provided above the intake port 185 in order to collect game balls B1 flowing down the gaming area PA upstream of the intake port 185 toward the intake port 185. Arranged. In the upper left area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b are lined up for changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the right and directing the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185, In the upper right area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b are lined up for changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the left and directing the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185.

As shown in FIG. 4, the plurality of nails 24b arranged near the upper part of the intake port 185 have a distance from the nail 24b to the left standing wall 181c and a distance from the nail 24b to the right standing wall 181d. It is provided so as to be at least one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, on the left and right sides of the adjustment mechanism 180, spaces are provided for allowing the game balls B1 that flow down toward the intake port 185 and are not taken into the intake port 185 to escape downstream. No nail 24b is placed in this space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flown down near the intake port 185 and has not been taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 is adjusted from between the nail 24b and the left side upright wall 181c or between the nail 24b and the right side upright wall 181d. It can be discharged to the left and right spaces of the mechanism 180. Thereby, the game ball B1 can be prevented from staying around the intake port 185.

Next, the detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be explained. First, the configuration for taking in the game ball B1 will be explained.

As already explained, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm, and the longitudinal length of the game area PA (FIG. 3) is 18 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. In this way, there is a gap in the game area PA that allows the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA to move in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 5, each of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is inclined forward toward the axis. Therefore, each of the concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the front when the concave portions 183b to 183e are in a rotating state in which they are opened upward. Become. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when the first recessed portion 183b is opened upward, the first recessed portion 183b is inclined downward toward the front.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 is accommodated in one of the recesses 183b to 183e that are open upward at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180. As described above, the recesses 183b to 183e that are open upward at the top of the adjustment mechanism 180 are inclined downwardly toward the front. Therefore, while the game ball B1 is being conveyed toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, the game ball B1 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) in the game area PA that has a thickness in the front-rear direction. do.

Next, the timing at which the adjustment mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B1 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 4, the intake port 185 is open upward. If the state in which any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is located below the intake port 185 is defined as the intake permission state, in the intake permission state, the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 is removed from the intake port 185. The game ball B1 that has entered can be accommodated in the recesses 183b to 183e.

On the other hand, if the rotating body 183 rotates from the state shown in FIG. In the prohibited state, the game ball B1 attempting to enter the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191. In this case, the game ball B1 is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180.

In the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180, as the rotating body 183 rotates, there are two states: a capture permission state in which the game ball B1 can be captured, and a capture prohibited state in which the game ball B1 cannot be captured. repeated alternately.

First, the case where the intake port 185 is in the intake permission state will be described. FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b) are front views of the game board 24 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner. The rotating body 183 in FIG. 7(a) is in a rotating state with the first concave portion 183b located above, and the rotating body 183 in FIG. This is a rotated state in which it has been rotated 90 degrees clockwise.

The game ball B1 that has entered the intake port 185 in a state where the intake is permitted is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e located above. For example, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the game ball B1 that has entered the intake port 185 with the first recess 183b positioned upward is taken into the first recess 183b.

The game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 as the rotating body 183 rotates. At this time, the right side upright wall 181d prevents the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from being released outside the adjustment mechanism 180 before the ejection timing arrives.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the game ball B1 taken into the first concave portion 183b is first subjected to a force directed forward in the rotational direction (to the right in FIG. 7(a)) from the first blade portion 188. is added. Next, the game ball B1, which is about to fall due to its own weight, is supported by the second blade portion 189.

Then, as shown in FIG. 7(b), a drag force is applied from the right side upright wall 181d to the game ball B1, which is about to fall toward the lower right due to its own weight and the force applied from the second blade part 189. , the game ball B1 is prevented from falling to the lower right. In this state, as the rotating body 183 rotates, the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

The game ball B1 that has been taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is connected to the ejection right side surface 181g (FIG. 4) of the ejection protrusion 181e (FIG. 4). Upon contact, it is ejected in a certain direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the side surface of the first blade part 188 located on the front side in the rotational direction is defined as a first front surface 188b, and the second blade part 188 located on the front side in the rotational direction The side surface of the blade portion 189 is defined as a second front surface 189b. Further, the side surface of the third blade section 190 located on the front side in the rotation direction is a third front surface 190b, and the side surface of the fourth blade section 191 located on the front side in the rotation direction is a fourth front surface 191b. shall be. The front surfaces 188b to 191b of each of the blade portions 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183.

When the game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e (FIG. 5(b)) in the rotating body 183 comes into contact with the right side surface 181g for ejection and reaches the ejection timing, the game ball B1 is In the concave portions 183b to 183e where B1 is present, the front surfaces 188b to 191b on the rear side in the rotational direction are in contact with the discharge right side surface 181g.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d have the same shape and size. For this reason, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the second recessed part 183c and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, and the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the third recessed part 183d and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. The manner of ejection is the same as the manner of ejection of the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

On the other hand, the fourth recessed part 183e has the same shape as the first recessed part 183b, the second recessed part 183c, and the third recessed part 183d, and is slightly smaller than the three recessed parts 183b to 183d. It has a size. For this reason, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recess 183e and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is that it is taken into the first recess 183b to third recess 183d and reaches the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. The discharge mode may be different from the discharge mode of the transported game ball B1. If the discharge manner of the game balls B1 discharged from all the recesses 183b to 183e is the same, the movement of the game balls B1 after discharge becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by changing the manner in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the fourth recessed portion 183e, it is possible to avoid the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B1 after being discharged from decreasing.

First, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into any one of the first recess 183b to the third recess 183d and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be explained using the case of the first recess 183b as an example.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are front views of the game board 24 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 8(a) illustrates the state immediately before the ejection timing of the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b, and FIG. 8(b) shows the state where the game ball B1 has reached the ejection timing. Illustrate the condition.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), immediately before the ejection timing, the contact state between the game ball B1 taken in the first recessed portion 183b and the right side upright wall 181d is canceled. As a result, the game ball B1, which has lost its support, is in a state where it can fall downward to the right side. However, since the rotating body 183 rotates at an angular velocity of 90° for 1 sec, the game ball B1 is pushed in the rotation direction (left direction in FIG. 8) from the first blade portion 188, and the game ball B1 is pushed in the rotation direction (left direction in FIG. 8) keep moving to.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), at the ejection timing, the game ball B1 is in contact with the ejection right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b. The distance between the two surfaces 181g and 188b sandwiching the game ball B1 gradually increases from the top to the bottom.

As the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, in the region sandwiched between the two surfaces 181g and 188b, the region having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 gradually disappears from the upper side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the right side for discharge 181g and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b both have a component that pushes the game ball B1 downward. . Therefore, the game ball B1 that has been taken into the first recessed portion 183b is pushed out downward as the rotating body 183 rotates. Then, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the game ball B1 is ejected downward from the first concave portion 183b and enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

At the ejection timing shown in FIG. 8(b), the ejection right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b are directed downwardly toward the game ball B1, which is originally about to fall downward due to its own weight. Apply force to make it fall. At this time, movement of the game ball B1 to the left is restricted by the right side surface 181g for ejection. Therefore, the ejection direction of the game ball B1 is limited to one direction, and the probability of winning the first through gate 35 is increased.

As already explained, at the outer edge of the rotating body 183, the width of the recesses 183b to 183e is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, immediately before the ejection timing, the position of the game ball B1 within the recesses 183b to 183e is not the same every time. The ejection direction of the game ball B1 differs depending on the position immediately before the ejection timing of the game ball B1 within the recesses 183b to 183e.

At the design stage, most of the game balls B1 taken into the first recess 183b, the game balls B1 taken into the second recess 183c, and the game balls B1 taken into the third recess 183d pass through the first through hole. The position of the ejection protrusion 181e and the inclination of the ejection right side surface 181g are adjusted so that the gate 35 is entered. However, as already explained, the distance between the discharge position in the adjustment mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the first recessed part 183b is caught on the first front surface 188b and pushed to the left, the game ball B1 discharged from the second recessed part 183c is pushed to the second front surface 189b. When the game ball B1 is caught and pushed to the left, and when the game ball B1 ejected from the third recessed part 183d is caught on the third front surface 190b and pushed to the left, the game ball B1 after being ejected is pushed through the first through hole. It may come off to the left of gate 35.

Here, the ejection mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recess 183e and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be explained. FIG. 9 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the adjustment mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner to explain the case where the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e comes off the first through gate 35.

As already explained, the fourth recess 183e is formed to be slightly smaller than the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recessed portion 183e is likely to be caught on the fourth front surface 191b and pushed to the left, and may easily come off to the left of the first through gate 35. .

At the design stage, the winning probability of the game ball B1 ejected from the fourth recess 183e to the first through gate 35 is determined by the probability that the game ball B1 ejected from the other three recesses 183b to 183d enters the first through gate 35. The position of the ejection protrusion 181e and the inclination of the ejection right side surface 181g are adjusted so that the winning probability is lower than the winning probability.

By configuring a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to be removed from the first through gate 35, the player's attention can be avoided from being focused only on taking the game ball B1 into the adjustment mechanism 180, and the game The player is also interested in the ejection of the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180.

As already explained, the discharge protrusion 181e is located below the center of the rotating body 183. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the center of the game ball B1 that is in contact with the ejection protrusion 181e at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180 is to the right of the center of the rotating body 183. positioned. The game ball B1 taken into the rotary body 183 at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 comes into contact with the discharge protrusion 181e and is discharged at a timing earlier than when the ball B1 rotates 180 degrees around the center of the rotary body 183.

The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged before it rotates more than 180 degrees around the center of the rotating body 183 and starts to rise, so that the game ball B1 at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged. It is possible to prevent an increase in B1. In addition, by setting a short time from when the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 to when it is discharged, the time required for the series of steps of taking in the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180, transporting it, and discharging it can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest will shift elsewhere during the series of flows.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), when the game ball B1 is in contact with both the ejection protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180, the left side of the game ball B1 is in contact with both the ejection protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183. The region sandwiched between the discharge right side surface 181g and the front surfaces 188b to 191b in contact with the right side of the game ball B1 has a shape that gradually becomes wider from the top to the bottom. Then, as the rotation of the rotating body 183 in the clockwise direction progresses, the width of the area sandwiched between the discharge right side surface 181g and the front surfaces 188b to 191b becomes narrower overall. For this reason, within the region sandwiched between the right side surface 181g for ejection and the front surfaces 188b to 191b, a portion having a width that allows the game ball B1 to exist is limited to the lower part.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), the right side surface 181g for discharge is inclined downward to the left. Therefore, when a leftward force is applied from the rotating rotating body 183 to the game ball B1 that is in contact with the right side surface 181g for ejection, the game ball B1 will move along the slope of the right side surface 181g for ejection. and move leftward and downward. At the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the ejection protrusion 181e and the rotary body 183 is pushed downward as the rotary body 183 rotates and is discharged. Since the right side surface 181g for ejection is inclined downward to the left, the game ball B1 is prevented from rising at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 and from remaining without being ejected.

Next, a configuration will be described in which the game ball B1 that attempts to enter the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 but is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 escapes to the rear of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is provided at the rear of the game board 24 as a passage for escaping game balls B1 that have not been taken in at the intake port 185. A passage entrance 171, which is an entrance to the escape passage 172, is provided on the front side of the game board 24. Passage entrance 171 is located behind intake port 185 . By allowing the game balls B1 not taken in at the intake port 185 to escape to the passage entrance 171, it is possible to prevent the game balls B1 not taken in from staying around the intake port 185.

First, the game ball B1 that flows down to the intake port 185 which is prohibited from being taken in and is not taken into the intake port 185 will be explained.

10(a) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when cut directly above the intake port 185 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24, and FIG. 10(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 24. 24 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first blade portion 188 when cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the blade portion 24. FIG. In FIGS. 10A and 10B, the rotating body 183 is in a rotating state with the first blade portion 188 positioned above.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the game ball B1 flows down into the intake port 185 in the state where the intake is prohibited, the game ball B1 falls into one of the rotating bodies 183 located below the intake port 185. It contacts the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a (FIG. 5(b)) of the blade parts 188 to 191.

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), the circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of each of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 have an inclination toward the axis toward the rear. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(a), when the first blade part 188 is facing upward, the circumferential surface 188a of the first blade part 188 is inclined downwardly toward the rear. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is guided rearward.

In the capture prohibited state where the second blade part 189 is facing upward, the circumferential surface 189a of the second blade part 189 is inclined downwardly toward the rear, and the third blade part 190 is facing upward. In the uptake prohibited state, the circumferential surface 190a of the third blade portion 190 is inclined downwardly toward the rear. In addition, in the take-in prohibited state in which the fourth blade part 191 faces upward, the circumferential surface 191a of the fourth blade part 191 is inclined downwardly toward the rear.

Although not shown in the drawings, the contact occurs with any of the circumferential surface 189a of the second blade part 189, the circumferential surface 190a of the third blade part 190, and the circumferential surface 191a of the fourth blade part 191, which face upward in the capture prohibited state. The game ball B1 is guided backward in the same manner as the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 shown in FIG. 10(a).

As shown in FIG. 4, the passage entrance 171 is an opening provided on the front surface of the game board 24, and is located behind the intake port 185. The passage entrance 171 is formed from the left end of the intake port 185 to the right end of the intake port 185 on the front surface of the game board 24.

The upper end of the passage entrance 171 is higher than the upper end of the game ball B1 that contacts the circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade parts 188 to 191 when any of the blade parts 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is facing upward. It is set approximately half the game ball B1 higher. Therefore, the game ball B1 flows down from above the game area PA, collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade parts 188 to 191 that are inclined downward toward the rear, and bounces diagonally backward, into the passage entrance 171. You can let the ball enter.

On the other hand, so that the game ball B1 flowing down the gaming area PA does not enter the passage entrance 171 before reaching the intake port 185, the area above the passage entrance 171 is taken into the intake port 185. The area is set to the minimum area that can prevent the game ball B1 from staying and staying there.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lower end of the left side of the passage entrance 171 is located below the upper end of the back surface of any of the blade parts 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 when the blade parts 188 to 191 are facing upward. It is located in Further, the lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 is located lower than the lower end on the left side. The lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the upper part of the base body 181a in the housing part 181 is provided with guides to the passage entrance 171 by circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a (FIG. 5(a)) of any of the blade parts 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183. The passage recessed portion 181f is formed so as not to obstruct the movement of the game ball B1.

The passage recess 181f is formed from the left end to the right end of the passage entrance 171. On the left side of the passage recess 181f, when any of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is facing upward, the upper end of the base body 181a is lower than the upper end of the back surface of the blade 188 to 191. It is formed to be located.

On the left side of the passage recess 181f, the upper end of the base body 181a is located at the same position as the lower end of the passage entrance 171 or above the lower end of the passage entrance 171. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the blade parts 188 to 191 while trying to enter the intake port 185 in the prohibited state is 191a, and the ball enters the passage entrance 171 without being obstructed by the base body 181a of the accommodating portion 181.

As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is formed in the front surface of the game board 24 as a concave portion that is concave toward the rear. The escape passage 172 is formed as a recessed portion having a depth dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the front-back direction and a width dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the lateral direction. There is. For this reason, the escape passage 172 has a passage cross section through which the game balls B1 can pass through in one row.

The upstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed toward the lower left from the passage entrance 171, and the downstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed vertically downward. The escape passage 172 guides the game ball B1 that enters from the passage entrance 171 to the lower left of the first through gate 35.

On the front surface of the game board 24, a step is provided at the edge of the recessed portion formed as the escape passage 172. The escape passage 172 is covered from the front with a transparent acrylic plate 172a formed to have the same shape as a portion of the housing portion 181 that does not overlap with the base body 181a when the escape passage 172 is viewed from the front. The acrylic plate 172a is fixed to a stepped portion formed at the edge of the escape passage 172 using an adhesive.

The step formed at the edge of the escape passage 172 has the same depth as the thickness of the acrylic plate 172a in the front-rear direction, and the front surface of the acrylic plate 172a is located on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24. ing. The escape passage 172 is closed by the acrylic plate 172a and the base body 181a of the accommodating part 181, and the places where the game ball B1 can go in and out are limited to the passage entrance 171 and the passage exit 173.

Since the acrylic plate 172a and the adjustment mechanism 180 fixed in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent, the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 can be visually recognized from the outside. If the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 cannot be grasped from the outside, the player cannot follow the movement process of the game ball B1 after the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance 171, and the game ball The flow of B1 is interrupted in the middle. On the other hand, by making the game balls B1 passing through the escape passage 172 visible from the outside, it is possible to maintain a continuous flow of the game balls B1 that can be grasped by the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the game board 24, a passage exit 173, which is the exit of the escape passage 172, is provided at the lower left of the first through gate 35. The passage outlet 173 is formed as an opening facing forward on the front surface of the game board 24. The passage outlet 173 has a shape and size that allows the game balls B1 guided by the escape passage 172 to be discharged forward one by one.

As shown in FIG. 4, an exit is provided near the upper side of the passageway exit 173 to prevent the game ball B1 discharged from the passageway exit 173 from colliding with the game ball B1 flowing down in front of the front surface of the game board 24. A roof 174 is provided. The exit roof 174 is provided as a protrusion that protrudes from the front of the game board 24 toward the window panel 52 (FIG. 1), and extends from the front of the game board 24 to the vicinity of the back of the window panel 52. ing. Since the upper surface of the exit roof 174 is inclined downward to the right, the game ball B1 that flows down from above and comes into contact with the exit roof 174 does not collide with the game ball B1 that is discharged from the passageway exit 173. You will be guided to the right in this manner.

The game ball B1 passed through the escape passage 172 and discharged from the passage outlet 173 forward of the front surface of the game board 24 flows down the game area PA. As shown in FIG. 3 , the passage outlet 173 is located upstream of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and the game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided. It is possible to win a prize.

As already explained, the game ball B1 that has entered the first through gate 35 can also flow down the gaming area PA and enter either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The game ball B1 guided to the first through gate 35 by the adjustment mechanism 180 and the game ball B1 guided to the escape passage 172 by the adjustment mechanism 180 and discharged from the passage outlet 173 are both connected to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port. 34 is provided. Therefore, by providing the adjustment mechanism 180, the number of game balls B1 that reach the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided does not decrease.

Returning to the explanation of how the game ball B1 is taken into the intake port 185, as shown in FIG. When the game ball B1 flows down into the intake port 185 at the timing when the diameter of the game ball B1 changes from a state wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 hits the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right side upright wall 181d. It may get caught. In the following, a state transitioning from an import-permitted state to an import-prohibited state will be referred to as an intermediate state. Further, the end surface that defines the right end of the intake port 185 and is located above the right standing wall 181d that sandwiches the game ball B1 together with the blades 188 to 191 in the intermediate state is referred to as the standing wall side end surface 182. .

Here, a configuration for letting the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the upright wall side end surface 182 at the intake port 185 in the intermediate state to escape into the escape passage 172 will be described. First, the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b, which are the side surfaces of the blade portions 188 to 191 and located on the front side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 183, will be explained with reference to FIG. 5(b).

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 are inclined rearward in the rotational direction. Therefore, when the blades 188 to 191 are facing upward, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blades 188 to 191 are inclined leftward toward the rear.

No matter what rotational state the rotating body 183 is in, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the vanes 188 to 191 located above are inclined leftward toward the rear. For this reason, in the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the second front surface 189b of the second blade part 189 and the standing wall side end surface 182, the third front surface 190b of the third blade part 190 and the standing wall side end surface 182. The game ball B1 sandwiched between the wall-side end surface 182 and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the fourth front surface 191b of the fourth blade part 191 and the standing wall-side end surface 182 are connected to the first front surface 188b of the first blade part 188. It moves in the same direction as the game ball B1 sandwiched between the upright wall side end surface 182. Below, the movement of the game ball B1 that is sandwiched between the intake port 185 in the intermediate state will be explained using the game ball B1 that is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the upright wall side end surface 182 as an example.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 facing upward is inclined leftward toward the rear. FIG. 10(c) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when cut directly above the intake port 185 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 10(c), the standing wall side end surface 182 is inclined to the right toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 in the intermediate state and is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the standing wall side end surface 182, the two surfaces 182, 188b sandwiching the game ball B1, The rear side (the game board 24 side) is wider than the front side (the window panel 52 side), creating a "V" shaped relationship.

When the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise in a state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the two surfaces 182, 188b, the distance between the two surfaces 182, 188b gradually becomes smaller from the front side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the standing wall side end surface 182 are both components that move the game ball B1 toward the rear. have. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the game ball B1 sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b is moved through the passage provided behind the intake port 185 by the rotation of the rotating body 183. It is pushed out toward the entrance 171. Then, the pushed out game ball B1 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 and is guided to the passage exit 173.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 5(b), the front surfaces 188b to 191b of each of the blade portions 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183. Therefore, if the game ball B1 comes into contact with both of the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the right standing wall 181d (FIG. 10(c)) at the intake port 185, the game ball The front surfaces 188b to 191b in contact with B1 are downwardly inclined to the left. For this reason, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the front surfaces 188b to 191b when the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise includes a downward component. Thereby, when the game ball B1 is pushed out toward the passage entrance 171, the game ball B1 is prevented from moving upward.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), a configuration in which the sandwiched game ball B1 is pushed out to the passage entrance 171 by using the inclinations of the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182, and the rotation of the rotating body 183. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the state where the game ball B1 is pinched while avoiding the game ball B1 from staying or rising.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the right side of the passage entrance 171 and on the right side of the passage recessed part 181f, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade parts 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right side upright wall 181d in an intermediate state is placed at the passage entrance. 171 so that it can enter the ball.

The game ball B1 that is sandwiched between the blade parts 188 to 191 and the right side standing wall 181d is lower than the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the peripheral surface 188a to 191a of any of the blade parts 188 to 191 in the capture prohibited state. Located in Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 is located lower than the lower end on the left side of the passage entrance 171, and the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is , is located below the upper end of the base body 181a on the left side of the passage recess 181f.

The upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recessed part 181f is located below the lower end of the game ball B1 which is sandwiched between the blade parts 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. Further, the lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 is formed to be at the same position as the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recessed part 181f, or to be located below the upper end of the base body 181a.

However, in the taking-in permission state, the game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 may pass through the passage recess 181f formed at the rear and enter the passage entrance 171. In order to prevent this, the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recessed part 181f is positioned slightly below the lower end of the game ball B1 which is sandwiched between the blade parts 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. It is set.

Furthermore, as already explained, each of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is tilted forward toward the axis, so the game ball B1 taken into each of the recesses 183b to 183e is in the gaming area PA. held in front. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 taken into each of the recesses 183b to 183e enters the passage entrance 171 through the passage recess 181f located at the rear (particularly the right side of the passage recess 181f). has been reduced.

At the intake port 185, in a state where one game ball B1 has already been taken into the recesses 183b to 183e located above (FIG. 7(a)), another game ball B1 is inserted into the intake port. It is conceivable that the number reaches 185. In this case, the recesses 183b to 183e are already held on the window panel 52 side. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the center of the game ball B1 that has arrived at the intake port 185 later will be located further back than the center of the game ball B1 that has already been taken into the recesses 183b to 183e. In this case, the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later comes into contact with the game ball B1 that has been taken in the recesses 183b to 183e, bounces back, and enters the passage entrance 171.

In addition, if the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is shifted to the left or right from the center of the game ball B1 that has been taken into the recesses 183b to 183e, the intake port 185 The game ball B1 that has reached the point contacts the game ball B1 taken in the recesses 183b to 183e and rebounds to either the left or right, and without being taken into the adjustment mechanism 180, it moves to the game area PA on the side of the adjustment mechanism 180. It will flow downstream. In this way, when a plurality of game balls B1 reach the intake port 185 in a state where the intake port 185 is allowed to take in one time, one game ball B1 is placed in one of the recesses 183b to 183e. At the same time, the remaining game balls B1 can flow downstream of the game area PA without staying near the intake port 185.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of the game ball B1 that has flown down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball B1 that has entered any of the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is sent to any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. When the ball hits the crab, it will be ejected from the game area PA. The game ball B1 that enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls B1 that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are led to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). It will be collected at Then, the game balls B1 collected by the discharge ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting the game ball B1. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball B1 that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 was detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the ball B1 entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side. The game ball B1 is detected by the second winning a prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. The game ball B1 that has entered one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage section 45, and the game ball B1 that has entered the special electric winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage section 45. is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball B1 that has entered the first operating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided such that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the game ball B1 that has entered the second operating port 34 is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. It is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a while passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball B1 that has entered the out-port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage section 48. is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

Note that the game ball B1 that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a first gate detection sensor 49a is provided for the first through gate 35, and a second gate detection sensor 50a is provided for the second through gate 39. Therefore, the game ball B1 passing through the first through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the game ball B1 passing through the second through gate 39 is detected by the second through gate 35. It is detected by the gate detection sensor 50a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 50a, any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the game balls B1. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 50a are electrically connected to a main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 50a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 50a output a LOW level signal when the game ball B1 is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball B1 is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls B1 put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls B1 in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. Note that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint that connects the plurality of case bodies that make up the board box 60a inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesive target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a can be considered.

A back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls B1 supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls B1 stored in the tank 75. There is. The game balls B1 put out by the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball B1. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The main side ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG. 12, the main side ROM 64 contains a low-frequency winning determination value table T1 used in the general electricity opening lottery to determine whether or not to open or close the general electricity accessory 34a, and a high-frequency winning judgment value table T1. A judgment value table T2 is stored. In the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2, determination values that are eligible for winning in the general electricity open lottery are recorded. The details of the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determining value table T2 will be described later.

The main RAM 65 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the manner in which the game ball B1 enters the game area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball B1 into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. According to the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is grasped.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a include the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operating opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an outlet detection sensor 48a, a first gate detection sensor 49a, and a second gate detection sensor 50a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a, the main CPU 63 determines whether the ball enters each ball entry section. Further, the main side CPU 63 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings to the first operating port 33 and various drawings based on winnings to the second operating port 34.

A power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The payout control device 77 receives, for example, a prize ball command based on the fact that the game ball B1 has entered the prize ball corresponding entry portion of the ball entry portions in which the occurrence of ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball B1. Output. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there are a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity prize winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32. A drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and an adjustment drive section 184 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure pending display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main side CPU 63 so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric utility object 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the general electric utility object 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game round, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general utility object 34a, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the general public figure display section 38a. In addition, when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a variable display starts in the special symbol display section 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special symbol pending display section 37b. is executed, and when a winning occurs in the through gates 35 and 39, or when a variable display is started on the common picture display section 38a, display control of the common picture pending display section 38b is executed in the main CPU 63. .

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, the adjustment drive unit 184, etc. each generates the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power supply. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be described using FIG. 13.

When playing a game, the main CPU 63 uses various types of counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, settings for display on the special pattern display section 37a, settings for display on the pattern display device 41, settings for display on the general pattern display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed when the winning occurs. Determine the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when playing, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric power open state, and an initial value setting of the general electric utility object opening counter C4 are set. The opening initial value counter C5 is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The data is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The reservation storage area 65a includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, a combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of reservation area RE2 → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls B1 to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be stored in a pending memory up to a maximum of four. There is.

Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. At this time, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

In addition, the information corresponding to the general electric utility object opening counter C4 is stored in the general electric power holding storage area 65c provided in the main side RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39. be done.

The general power reservation storage area 65c includes a general power reservation area HA and a general power execution area HB. The general electric power holding area HA includes a first general electric power holding area HA1, a second general electric power holding area HA2, a third general electric power holding area HA3, and a fourth general electric power holding area HA4. In accordance with the history of winnings to the second through gate 39, the numerical information of the general electricity accessory opening counter C4 is stored as general electricity reservation information in any of the general electricity holding areas HA1 to HA4.

In this case, in the first general electricity holding area HA1 to the fourth general electricity holding area HA4, if winnings in the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 occur multiple times in a row, the first general electricity holding area HA1 to the fourth general electricity holding area HA4 are Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the following order: holding area HA1 → second general electricity holding area HA2 → third general electricity holding area HA3 → fourth general electricity holding area HA4. By providing the four electric power holding areas HA1 to HA4 in this way, the winning history of game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. It has become.

Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The general electric power execution area HB is an area in which general electric power reservation information for which a general electric power release lottery is to be performed is stored when a variable display is started on the general electric power map display section 38a (FIG. 3). Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general electricity map display section 38a, the general electricity reservation information stored in the first general electricity reservation area HA1 is shifted to the general electricity execution area HB.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the general utility utility release counter C4 and the release initial value counter C5 will be explained. The general utility utility release counter C4 and the release initial value counter C5 are loop counters that are sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 65535, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. When the general electric utility object opening counter C4 completes one round, the value of the opening initial value counter C5 at that time is read as the initial value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, the general power open lottery is executed when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35, 39 as an opportunity. Numerical information updated in the general utility goods release counter C4 is used for the general public electricity release lottery. Specifically, when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39, the numerical information updated in the general utility object opening counter C4 is acquired as the random number for opening. In the following, the numerical information that is updated by the public utility goods opening counter C4, obtained upon winning in the through gates 35 and 39, and used for the public utility lottery, will be referred to as an opening random number. In the general electricity release lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not the random number for release subject to the lottery is a winning judgment value that is eligible for the general electricity release winning, and if an affirmative determination is made, the general electricity release is won. , if a negative determination is made, a negative result is obtained.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game ball B1 continues to be launched in the same manner into the game area PA, the electric utility object 34a of the second actuating port 34 increases per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high or low.

First, the general electricity release lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode will be explained. The main side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in which the winning determination value for the general electricity release winning is recorded in the general electricity release lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode. ing. FIG. 14(a) is a low-frequency winning determination value table T1.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the winning determination value of the general electricity release lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode is set to (250×n-5) to (250×n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 262. The probability of winning the general electricity release lottery in the general electricity release lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is approximately 1/42.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the winning determination values that are subject to the general electricity open winning are serially numbered in units of six. Moreover, the update period of the random number for release in the utility power release counter C4 is 4 msec. Therefore, in the utility power supply release counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for release becomes the winning determination value for the utility power release winning target in the utility power release lottery in the low-frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

Assuming that the winning period is a 24 msec period in which the winning determination value that is the target of the general electricity open winning continues, the winning period occurs at a 1-sec cycle in the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 14(a). Here, if the timing at which the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4) enters the first through gate 35 is the winning possible timing, as described above, the period at which the winning possible timing occurs is low. The period is 1 sec, which is the same as the frequency at which the winning period occurs in the frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period in which the winning timing overlaps with the winning period becomes a continuous winning period in which general power open winnings occur consecutively. The winning consecutive period continues until the initial value of the general electric utility object release counter C4 is updated and the timing of occurrence of the winning target period is shifted. If the timing of occurrence of the winning period is shifted, there will be a continuous non-winning period in which losing results continue in the general power open lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode until the winning period overlaps again with the winning timing.

As described above, the winning timing when the game ball B1 is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 and a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs can occur in a 1-sec cycle. For this reason, in the consecutive non-winning period and the consecutive winning period in the low frequency support mode, the regular symbol fluctuation time during which the regular symbol display section 38a (FIG. 3) fluctuates is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than 1 sec. For this reason, even if the ejection of the game balls B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 continues in a 1-sec cycle, when a winning occurs, the fluctuation of the common figure display section 38a corresponding to the previous winning is completed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a state in which the number of ordinary drawing reservation information exceeds the upper limit number (4 pieces) from becoming a regular occurrence.

Next, a general electricity release lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode will be explained. The main side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a high-frequency winning determination value table T2 in which the winning determination value for the general electricity release winning is recorded in the general electricity release lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode. ing. FIG. 14(b) is a high-frequency winning determination value table T2.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the winning determination value of the general electricity release lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode is set to (m to m+2). Here, the variable m is a natural number from 1 to 65,501. The probability of winning the general electricity release lottery in the general electricity release lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode is approximately 3/5. Further, the general pattern fluctuation time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 sec in order to speed up the digestion of the general pattern pending information.

The manner in which the general electricity accessory 34a is opened when the general electricity release is won in the low frequency support mode is the same as the opening manner of the general electricity accessory 34a when the general electricity release is won in the high frequency support mode. . Specifically, triggered by one general power opening winning, a series of opening and closing operations in which the general power accessory 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec is repeated five times. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the minimum amount of time secured for the next general electricity release lottery after one general electricity release lottery is held (i.e., one (display duration time) is set to the same length as the secured time in the high-frequency support mode.

In the case of a continuous period of non-winning in the low-frequency support mode, the general electricity release lottery basically does not occur in the general electricity release lottery that is held in response to winning in the first through gate 35. On the other hand, even during a continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a prize may be won at the second through gate 39 without the adjustment mechanism 180 above. In this case, in the general electricity lottery held as a trigger for winning the second through gate 39, the general electricity lottery will be won with a low probability (approximately 1/42). In the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, both the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 may occur. During the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, there is a low possibility that a general power open win will occur and the opening/closing operation of the general power accessory 34a will be executed, so the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is low. is higher than the probability of winning the prize at the second operating port 34.

In the case of the high-frequency support mode, in the general electricity opening lottery held as a trigger for winning through gates 35 and 39, there is a high probability (approximately 3/5) of winning the general electricity opening. Here, the interval at which the game ball B1 is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 seconds at the shortest. On the other hand, the interval at which the game ball B1 is released from the adjustment mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec at the shortest. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the second through gate 39 than to aim at the first through gate 35.

In the high frequency support mode, both the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 may occur. In the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of opening and closing of the general electricity utility object 34a is higher when the general electricity opening winning occurs, so the possibility of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than that of the second operation opening. There is a higher possibility of winning the 34th prize. Since the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B1 is executed when the second operating port 34 receives a prize, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has in the high-frequency support mode.

In the case of a consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the general electricity release winnings occur consecutively with a high probability in the general electricity release lottery that is held in response to winnings in the first through gate 35. For this reason, the opening/closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is performed more frequently, and during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 and the winning to the second operating port 34 become more frequent. Both can occur.

In the case of consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode, the interval between successive power supply open winnings is 1 sec at the shortest, and it is better to fire the game ball B1 aiming at the first through gate 35 than the second through gate 35. There is a higher possibility of winning the general electricity open than firing the game ball B1 aiming at the through gate 39. Therefore, in the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, aiming at the first through gate 35 is more advantageous for the player than aiming at the second through gate 39.

During the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the possibility of firing the game ball B1 at the first through gate 35 and winning the general power opening lottery is determined by The probability is higher than that of the game ball B1 being fired aiming at the 2-through gate 39, and the general electricity opening lottery being held, resulting in a general electricity opening winning. In addition, as already explained, the opening mode of the general electric utility object 34a when the general electric power opening is won in the low frequency support mode is the same as the opening mode of the general electric utility object 34a when the general electric power opening is won in the high frequency support mode. This is the same as the opening mode. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, when a continuous winning period comes, the state is temporarily such that winnings to the second operating port 34 are more likely to occur than in the high-frequency support mode.

The continuous winning period is set in the low-frequency support mode, in which the player has low expectations for winning at the second operating port 34, and the timing of transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode is the timing when the game starts. This is a configuration that does not notify the public. Therefore, during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the player performs the operation of firing the game ball B1 at the first through gate 35 while expecting the transition to the continuous winning period.

In the case of a pachinko machine in which consecutive winning periods do not occur, the possibility of a general power open winning in the low-frequency support mode is lower than the possibility of a general power open winning in the high-frequency support mode. For this reason, the player's level of expectation of winning the general electricity release is lower in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, as in the present pachinko machine 10, the configuration is such that the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode can be shifted to the continuous winning period by changing the initial value of the general utility object release counter C4. As a result, even though the player is in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to make the player expect that the game may shift to a continuous winning period in which there is a higher possibility of winning the general electricity release than in the high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, by arranging a structure in which the timing of the transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period is not notified to the player, the player can always maintain a sense of expectation that the transition to the continuous winning period may occur. can.

For this reason, while maintaining a state in which the possibility of winning the general electricity release in the low-frequency support mode, which combines the non-winning consecutive period and the winning consecutive period, is lower than the possibility of becoming the general electricity release winning in the high-frequency support mode. , it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the general electricity release in the low-frequency support mode.

Note that the configuration for making the frequency of the general power open state per unit time in the high-frequency support mode higher than that in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. Here, the low-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support mode that includes a continuous non-winning period and a continuous winning period. For example, the secured time that is secured between the time when one general electricity lottery is held and the next general electricity distribution lottery is held (for example, executed on the general electricity map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gates 35 and 39). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display times are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. It's okay. In addition, increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, shortening the time secured between one general electricity opening lottery and the next general electricity opening lottery, and reducing the amount of time secured. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying one or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning.

Here, the continuous winning period and the continuous non-winning period that occur during the low frequency support mode will be explained based on FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c) and FIGS. 16(a) to 16(d). First, in a comparative pachinko machine in which consecutive winning periods and consecutive non-winning periods do not occur, the timing of a general power open winning will be explained based on the time charts of FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c). FIG. 15(a) shows the timing at which winnings to the through gates 35 and 39 can occur in the comparative pachinko machine, and FIG. 15(b) shows the numerical value updated in the common electric utility opening counter C4 of the comparative pachinko machine. The information (random number for opening) shows the winning target period in which the winning judgment value is the target of the general electricity opening winning, and FIG. 15(c) shows the timing when the general electricity opening winning can occur in the comparison pachinko machine.

Here, the comparative pachinko machine refers to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4) is not provided on the game board 24, and the opening that is updated by the public utility object opening counter C4. This pachinko machine has a configuration in which the initial value of the random number is not updated. Furthermore, at the timings t1 to t6 shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the comparison pachinko machine is in the low frequency support mode. In the comparison pachinko machine, the timing at which winnings to the through gates 35 and 39 occur is random, so the timing shown in FIG. 15(a) is an example.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the game ball B1 hits the through gates 35 and 39 at timing t1. However, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the timing t1 is outside the winning period. The winning period starts at the timing t2 after the timing t1. Therefore, even if the random number for opening is acquired in response to the winning that occurred at the timing t1, and the general electricity opening lottery is held using the random number for opening, the result will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the next winning period starts at timing t3, which is after timing t2, the winning period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 15(a), when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39 at the timing t4 within the winning period, the winning that occurs at the timing t4 triggers the release. A random number is obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 15(c), in the general electricity release lottery held using the random number for release acquired at timing t4, the general electricity release is won.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), the next winning period that continues for 24 msec starts at timing t5, which is 1 sec after timing t3. Then, as shown in FIG. 15(a), at timing t6 after the end of the winning period, the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35, 39 and the random number for opening is acquired. As shown in FIG. 15(c), the general electricity release lottery performed using the random number for release obtained at timing t6 results in a loss.

In this way, in the comparative pachinko machine in which the adjustment mechanism 180 is not provided on the game board 24 and the initial value of the random number for opening is not updated, winning of the game ball B1 in the through gates 35 and 39 is not possible. The timing of occurrence is random, and only when the timing of the winning overlaps with the winning period that starts at a cycle of 1 sec, the general electricity open prize will be won. Therefore, in the comparison pachinko machine, no continuous winning period or continuous non-winning period occurs.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the timing at which the general power open winning occurs will be explained based on the time charts of FIGS. 16(a) to 16(d). FIG. 16(a) shows the timing when the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, and FIG. 16(b) shows the numerical information (random number for opening) updated in the general utility object opening counter C4. indicates the winning target period that is the winning determination value for winning the public electricity release, and FIG. 16(c) shows the initial value update timing of the numerical information (random number for release) updated in the general electricity utility release counter C4. , and FIG. 16(d) shows the timing at which the general electricity open election can occur. At the timings t1 to t12 shown in FIGS. 16(a) to 16(d), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning period starts at timing t1, and the winning period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the timing of t2 at which winning occurs in the first through gate 35 is the winning period that starts at the timing of t1 and the timing of t3, which is 1 second after the timing of t1. It is located between the next winning period and the timing outside the winning period. Therefore, even if a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 at the timing of t2, it will not become a general electricity open winning.

As already explained, the interval at which the game ball B1 can be ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec. As shown in FIG. 16(a), after the timing t2, the timing t4 at which winning can occur in the first through gate 35 is the timing 1 second after the timing t2. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the timing t4 is outside the winning period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(d), even if a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 at the timing t4, it will not become a general electricity open winning.

The cycle in which it is possible to enter the first through gate 35 and the cycle in which the winning period occurs are the same cycle. Therefore, if the timing at which a winning at the first through gate 35 can occur is shifted from the winning target period, there will be a continuous non-winning period in which there are consecutive losing results in the general electricity open lottery.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the initial value of the general utility utility release counter C4 is updated at timing t5. When the initial value of the general utility object opening counter C4 is updated, the winning timing for the first through gate 35 may shift and overlap with the winning period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning period starts at timing t6, which is later than timing t5. Then, as shown in FIG. 16(a), a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 at timing t7 within the winning period, and a random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(d), when the general electricity release lottery is executed using the random number for release acquired at timing t7, the general electricity release lottery is won in the general electricity release lottery.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning period starts again at timing t8, which is 1 second after timing t6. Further, as shown in FIG. 16(a), a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 at timing t9, which is 1 second after timing t7, and a random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(d), in the general electricity release lottery held using the random number for release obtained at timing t9, a general electricity release winning occurs. In this way, once the winning timing for the first through gate 35 overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a continuous winning period in which general electricity open winnings occur consecutively in the general electricity open lottery.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16(c), at timing t10, the initial value of the utility power release counter C4 is updated again. As a result, the timing at which a prize can be entered into the first through gate 35 is shifted from the winning period. As shown in FIG. 16(a), a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 at timing t11, which is later than timing t10, and a random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the timing t11 is outside the winning period, and the next winning period starts at the timing t12, which is later than the timing t11. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(d), when the general electricity release lottery is executed using the random number for release acquired at the timing t11, a winning result will be obtained. In this way, if the timing at which prizes can be entered in the first through gate 35 deviates from the winning target period due to the initial value update of the general utility goods opening counter C4, a non-winning result due to consecutive losing results in the general electricity opening lottery may occur. Return to continuous period.

As shown in FIG. 12, a postponement flag is set in the main side RAM 65 to "1" at the start timing of the continuous winning period, thereby making it possible to postpone updating of the initial value in the general utility goods release counter C4. 65d, and a deferment completion flag 65e which is set to "1" when it is in the continuous winning period and the update of the initial value in the general utility goods release counter C4 has already been postponed during the continuous winning period. and are provided.

In this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a consecutive winning period, the update of the initial value of the general utility object opening counter C4 is postponed once at the initial value update timing of the general electric utility object opening counter C4 that occurs for the first time thereafter. The structure is as follows. Frequently updating the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 increases the possibility that a non-winning consecutive period will become a winning consecutive period, and when a winning consecutive period occurs, the general electric utility goods opening counter C4 is updated. By postponing the update of the initial value, the winning consecutive winning period continues for a long time. Thereby, the occurrence of consecutive winning periods can be made attractive to players. By making the occurrence of a continuous winning period an event that the player expects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/fail table. As the pass/fail table, a pass/fail table for low probability mode and a pass/fail table for high probability mode are set. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming condition in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20. Note that the number of random numbers that result in a win is arbitrary, as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the opening/closing mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions, namely, the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, round games are executed up to a predetermined number of times.

Here, the round game is played until either one of the following conditions is met: the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls B1 enters the prize in the special electric winning device 32. It is a game that continues. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is a fixed number of rounds and is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds, regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for one opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short-time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. has been done.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball B1 is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. controlled. Further, in the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game, more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball B1. There is. Therefore, if one opening is made in a long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will receive a prize equal to the upper limit number in one round game, and one in a short-time mode. When the number of rounds is opened, it is expected that no winnings will be made to the special electric winning device 32, or that only one prize will be won, if any.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration time for one opening, and the upper limit number of pieces in one round game are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. is not limited to the above values and may be set arbitrarily if the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode. It is.

The distribution destinations of game results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. As such distribution destinations, a low-probability jackpot result, a low-win high-probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result are set.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

For low winning and high probability jackpot results, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

In relation to each of the above gaming states, the normal gaming state refers to a state where the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, not the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a low win/high probability jackpot result is not set as the game result. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode with a low winning/high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to low probability jackpot results. "15-29" corresponds to the most profitable jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that is capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This refers to a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of fluctuating display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making users expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the ready-to-reach display, the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed. This includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol row. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows after the variable display of the symbols has started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in a situation in which symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows, or in some symbol rows but in a plurality of symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol column, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column. Also included are those in which the background screen is set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and those in which the symbols on the symbol row are set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, this is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that a preview display with a low appearance rate is A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that the occurrence is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the display duration time of symbols on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main side CPU 63 are set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is further determined whether the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined ( Step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for making the management IC 66 recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62 are performed. Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be explained later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S111 is completed and before the process in step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S112 to step S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S113, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI and the release initial value counter C5, and in step S114, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. do. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 65, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S115, the process returns to step S112 and repeats the processes in steps S112 to S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an infinite loop is executed after executing power outage processing. Become. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and after performing a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, it is added to the reading source counter. Execute the overwriting process. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After step S202, in step S203, an open counter update process is executed to update the general utility utility open counter C4 (FIG. 13). Details of the open counter update process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S204, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI and the release initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) as in step S113, and in step S205, as in step S114, Execute fluctuation counter update processing.

The general electric utility object opening counter C4 is a loop counter, and the opening counter update process for updating the general electric utility object opening counter C4 is periodically executed. Therefore, the initial value update timing of the general electric utility object opening counter C4, which occurs when the general electric utility object opening counter C4 makes one round, occurs periodically.

Here, when the initial value counter for opening C5 for updating the initial value of the general utility utility opening counter C4 is a loop counter and the update of the initial value counter for opening C5 is periodically executed, Numerical information acquired as an initial value from the initial value counter for release C5 at the initial value update timing of the utility object release counter C4 is limited to a part of the numerical information that has been updated by the initial value counter for release C5. .

In this case, the timing of occurrence of consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode described above will not be random. Situations in which the winning period and the winning timing do not overlap, and no continuous winning period occurs; situations in which the winning period and the winning timing frequently overlap, resulting in frequent winning periods; and situations in which the winning consecutive period occurs regularly. This may occur, and a situation may occur in which the timing of the consecutive winning period is easily guessed by the player.

On the other hand, this pachinko machine 10 performs the random number initial value update process for updating the opening initial value counter C5 both in the regular timer interrupt process and in the non-periodic residual process of the main process. This is the configuration to be executed with. Therefore, the winning period and the winning timing overlap at an appropriate frequency. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode that combines the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period, the possibility of a general electricity release election occurring is lower than the possibility of a general electricity release election occurring in the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to generate a winning consecutive period.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, after executing the fluctuation counter updating process in step S205, in step S206, a rotation control process for rotating the rotating body 183 once every 4 seconds is executed. In the rotation control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to rotate the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive section 184 that is communicated with the rotating body 183, and if it is the timing to rotate the output shaft 184a, the adjustment is performed. A pulse signal is sent to the drive unit 184 to rotate the output shaft 184a. In this rotation control process, a pulse signal for rotating the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 by 0.72° is transmitted once every 8 msec. That is, in the timer interrupt process executed at a 4 msec cycle, the adjustment drive unit 184 is driven by transmitting a pulse signal once every two times.

Thereafter, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S207). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In the subsequent step S208, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S208, the processes from step S209 onwards are executed.

In step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, a reading process is executed (step S210). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S211). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are read, and based on the reading results, the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 are activated. , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34, the first through gate 35, and the second through gate 39 is determined. Note that the details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S212). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

After that, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball B1 is executed (step S213). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball B1 is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the subsequent step S214, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S210, the disconnection of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a is confirmed, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed. I do.

Thereafter, a special figure special electric control process for controlling the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S215). In the special figure special electric control process, if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, A process is executed in which numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the time is stored in the pending storage area 65a in chronological order as pending information.

Here, if the period during which the general electric utility object 34a is opened and closed is defined as the support execution period, if a prize is won to the second operating port 34 during the support execution period, the winning counter during support will be displayed. Performs processing to add "1". Then, when the value of the win counter during support reaches the upper limit number of wins set in the support execution period, the support end flag is set to "1". Here, the support winning counter is a counter that the main side CPU 63 refers to in order to grasp the total number of winnings to the second operating port 34 that occur during the support execution period, and is a counter that is provided in the main side RAM 65. There is. The winning prize counter during support is cleared to "0" at the start timing of the support execution period. In addition, the support end flag is referenced by the main CPU 63 in order to understand that the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 that occurred during the support execution period has reached the upper limit number of times, and it is the end timing of the support execution period. This flag is provided in the main RAM 65.

In the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the game is not in progress or opening/closing execution mode, and the pending information is stored, a validity determination process that determines whether or not the pending information corresponds to a jackpot winning; And if it corresponds to a jackpot win, a distribution determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to.

Here, in the success/failure determination process, if the jackpot is won, the high frequency flag is set to "1". The high-frequency flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the support mode for winning to the second operating port 34 is the high-frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 specifies which of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode is the support mode for winning into the second operating port 34 by referring to the high-frequency flag. As already explained, in the case of a jackpot result, regardless of which jackpot it is, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the special figure special electric train control process, in addition to the win/fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process, if the hold information does not correspond to a jackpot win, it is determined whether the hold information corresponds to a reach occurrence. The reach determination process is executed, and the process of selecting the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, a variation command including duration information according to the results of each process and a type command including game result information are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81, and the pattern on the special figure display section 37a is Start variable display. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to start a game round performance corresponding to the contents of these commands. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to start variable display of symbols corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether or not the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed, thereby determining whether it is the end timing of the game round. Determine. If it is the end timing, a process is executed to end the game round while displaying a display corresponding to the game result. In this case, if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special pattern display section 37a, and the current game When the game round corresponds to a losing result, the symbol corresponding to the losing result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Furthermore, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to finish the production of the current game round. Further, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the performance of the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round is a result corresponding to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 81. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state, and when the round game is finished, the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is sent to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is sent to the voice emission control device 81. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is to be ended, an ending command indicating this is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to execute effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening/closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, the winning lottery mode and support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Executes processing to set the mode.

Specifically, when the type of jackpot result is a low-probability jackpot, "100" is set in the game number counter as the termination criterion for the high-frequency support mode. The number of games counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the number of games equal to the end reference number has been played in a state where the high frequency support mode is set. The numerical information set in the game number counter is updated so that "1" is subtracted based on the completion of the game time. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot result is a low winning, high probability jackpot, or when it is a most advantageous jackpot result, "1" is set in the indefinite flag. The indefinite flag is a flag for continuing the high-frequency support mode until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery turns into a jackpot state after the opening/closing execution mode ends and the game shifts to the jackpot state. In the high-frequency support mode where the indefinite flag is set to "1", if the jackpot result that occurs is a low-probability jackpot, the indefinite flag is cleared to "0" and the number of games counter is set to "100". is set, and when the generated jackpot result is a low winning, high probability jackpot, or when it is a most profitable jackpot, the indefinite flag is set to "1" again.

In the timer interrupt process, after executing the special figure/special electric line control process in step S215, the regular figure/general electric line control process is executed (step S216). In the general electric power distribution control process, when a prize has been won in the through gates 35 and 39, a general electric power opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open or close the general electric power accessory 34a. , and performs a process of displaying the general-purpose map display section 38a and opening and closing the general-purpose electric utility object 34a in a manner according to the result of the general electric power opening lottery. Details of the general electric power control processing will be described later.

In the following step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S215 and step S216, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. , Output information is set to reflect the increase/decrease in the number of hold information related to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure pending display section 38b. Further, in step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S215 and step S216, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state reception process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S218). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S220). Thereafter, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball B1 in the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S221). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, the open counter update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the open counter update process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, in step S301, the current numerical information in the general utility utility release counter C4 is read out, and in step S302, it is determined whether the current numerical information read out in step S301 is the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value. It is determined whether or not. Here, the current initial value is numerical information that is newly stored every time the initial value of the general utility utility release counter C4 is updated.

If the current numerical information is a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value (step S302: YES), it means that this time is the timing to update the initial value of the general utility object release counter C4. In this case, in step S303, it is determined whether the high frequency flag is set to "1". If the high frequency flag is not set to "1" in step S303, it means that the mode is low frequency support mode. In this case, it is determined in step S304 whether the send-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12) is set to "1".

As already explained, the main RAM 65 (FIG. 12) includes a send-off flag 65d (FIG. 12) and a send-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12). The send-off flag 65d is a flag that is set to "1" when there is a continuous winning period in the general electricity release lottery held in the low-frequency support mode, and the general electricity release winning occurs three times in a row.

In the low-frequency support mode, the general power open winning can occur if a prize is won in the second through gate 39 during a continuous non-winning period, and if a prize is won in the first through gate 35 during a continuous winning period. In some cases, a prize may be won in the second through gate 39 during the continuous winning period. Among these, the probability of winning the general electricity open when a winning occurs in the second through gate 39 is approximately 1/42 in both the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity sale three times in a row in the general electricity lottery held as a trigger for winning the second through gate 39 is low (approximately 1/74000); It is very rare for a general power grid to be elected twice in a row. Furthermore, even if it happens by chance, if the next general power open election results in a losing result, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, during the continuous winning period, if a general electricity lottery is held triggered by winning in the first through gate 35, the general electricity opening lottery will be held. For this reason, if a continuous winning period occurs while the player is operating the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35, winnings at the first through gate 35 will not be possible after the continuous winning period begins. When this occurs three times, the send-off flag 65d is set to "1". During the consecutive winning period, at the initial value update timing that occurs when the postponement flag 65d is set to "1", the update of the initial value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4 is postponed.

Further, the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" when the initial value update timing is reached with the send-off flag 65d set to "1" and the update of the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 is postponed. This is the flag to be used. Here, the send-off flag 65d is a flag that is set to "1" on the condition that the mode is low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the send-off flag 65d is never set to "1" in the high-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1", so the send-off completion flag 65e is not set to "1". The process of setting "1" to the send-off flag 65d will be described later.

If the postponement completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S304 of the release counter update process (FIG. 19), the update of the initial value of the utility utility product release counter C4 has already been postponed during the current consecutive winning period. It means that it was given.

If the send-off completion flag 65e is not set to "1" in step S304, it is determined in step S305 whether or not the send-off flag 65d is set to "1". If the postponement flag 65d is set to "1" (step S305: YES), it means that the current initial value update timing is the initial value update timing for the postponement target. In this case, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" in step S306, and the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S307.

After determining in step S302 that it is not time to update the initial value, or after clearing the send-off completion flag 65e to "0" in step S307, in step S308, the current numerical information is set to the maximum value of the general utility utility release counter C4. (“65505”).

If the current numerical information is not the maximum value in step S308, "1" is added to the current numerical information to update the numerical information in step S309. Further, if the current numerical information is the maximum value in step S308, the numerical information is updated by clearing the current numerical information to "0" in step S310.

If the postponement completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S304, after the initial value update is postponed, the utility power utility release counter C4 makes one revolution and the initial value update timing is reached again. It means that. In this case, the send-off completion flag 65e is cleared to "0" in step S311.

After determining that the mode is high-frequency support mode in step S303, or determining that the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1" in step S305, or clear the send-off completion flag 65e to "0" in step S311. After that, the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 is updated. Specifically, in step S312, the current numerical information of the opening initial value counter C5 is acquired. Then, in step S313, the numerical information acquired in step S312 is used as a new initial value to overwrite the current initial value to update the initial value. In this way, the winning target period is shifted by changing the initial value of the general utility object opening counter C4. Thereby, the transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period can occur at a timing that is not notified to the player. The initial value updated in step S313 is used in step S302 to determine whether it is time to update the initial value.

In the subsequent step S314, the initial value updated in step S313 is overwritten in the general utility utility release counter C4, thereby updating the numerical information of the general utility utility facility release counter C4, and the present release counter update process is ended. do.

In this way, by configuring the initial value to be postponed at the first initial value update timing of the general utility goods release counter C4 after the winning consecutive period begins, the duration of the winning consecutive period is extended and the winning The continuous period can be made more attractive to the player. On the other hand, when the initial value update timing has arrived in the high-frequency support mode (step S303: YES), the initial value update of the general utility utility release counter C4 is always executed.

Next, the general electric power control process executed in step S216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the regular electricity control process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize has been won in the through gates 35 and 39, a process is executed to acquire the reservation information on the general electrician side, and the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored. If there is a general electricity release lottery, the holding information is used to perform a general electricity release lottery, and further, using the general electricity release lottery as an opportunity, a process for performing a production for general electricity maps is executed. Further, based on the result of the general electricity opening lottery, a process for opening and closing the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the general map general electric power control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first in step S401, a reservation information acquisition process on the general public map side is executed to acquire the reservation information corresponding to the winnings in the through gates 35 and 39. get. Here, the reservation information acquisition process on the ordinary card side will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the pending information acquisition process on the general map side executed by the main CPU 63.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not a winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 has occurred by determining whether or not the first gate winning flag is set to "1". Here, the first gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. If the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S502.

If "1" is not set in the first gate winning flag in step S501, the process moves to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game ball B1 to the second through gate 39 has occurred by determining whether or not the second gate winning flag is set to "1". Here, the second gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39.

If the second gate winning flag is not set to "1" in step S503, the pending information acquisition process is terminated, and if the second gate winning flag is set to "1", In step S504, the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

After clearing the first gate winning flag to "0" in step S502 or clearing the second gate winning flag to "0" in step S504, in step S505, the current power grid in the power grid holding area HA is It is determined whether the number of pending information is less than the upper limit number (four). Then, when the general electricity reservation information is the upper limit number (step S505: NO), the main reservation information acquisition process is directly terminated, and when the general electricity reservation information is less than the upper limit number (step S505: YES), step The process moves to S506. In step S506, the numerical information of the utility power release counter C4 is stored in the utility power reservation areas HA1 to HA4 having the highest priority among the empty power utility reservation areas HA1 to H4, and the main power reservation information acquisition process is performed. end.

In one processing time, acquisition of pending information corresponding to "1" set in the first gate winning flag, and acquisition of pending information corresponding to "1" set in the second gate winning flag. If the configuration is such that both of the above are executed, the two pieces of pending information acquired in the processing cycle will be the same pending information.

On the other hand, in the pending information acquisition process on the general map side, if both the first gate winning flag and the second gate winning flag are set to "1" in the current processing round, the first gate Only the reservation information corresponding to the fact that the winning flag is set to "1" is acquired. Then, acquisition of pending information corresponding to the fact that the second gate winning flag is set to "1" is executed in the next processing round.

Therefore, if the period in which the second gate winning flag is set to "1" overlaps with the period in which the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the second through gate 39 of the game ball B1 The random number for opening obtained as a result of winning in the first through gate 35 can be different from the random number for opening obtained as a result of winning in the first through gate 35.

Returning to the description of the general-purpose figure/general electric power control process (FIG. 20), after executing the general electric power figure side hold information acquisition process in step S401, in step S402, the information of the general electric power figure/general electric power counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed. In step S403, a process of reading out the general address table from the main side ROM 64 is executed. Then, in step S404, a process is executed to obtain a start address corresponding to the information of the regular, regular, and general electric counter from the regular, regular, and general electric address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S402 to S404 will be explained. As already explained, the ordinary figure general electric power control process includes the process related to the ordinary electric figure production and the process related to opening and closing of the ordinary electric power accessory 34a. In this case, as the processing related to the production for the ordinary figure, the ordinary figure fluctuation start process, the ordinary figure fluctuation process, and the ordinary figure confirmation process are set. Furthermore, as the processing related to opening and closing of the general electric utility object 34a, a general electric power opening process and a general electric power closing process are set.

In such a processing configuration, the general purpose electricity counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the above plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is a counter that is used in the general purpose electricity address table. The start address of the program for executing the plurality of types of processing described above is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general figure and general electricity counter.

Numerical information from "0" to "4" can be set for the general purpose electricity counter, and the general purpose electric address table starts with a one-to-one correspondence to each numerical information of the general purpose electricity counter. Address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal figure fluctuation start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal figure fluctuation, and the start address NSA2 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal electricity grid confirmation, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal electricity release, and the start address NSA4 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal electricity supply closure. This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the general-purpose and general-purpose electricity counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the general-purpose and general electric power counter is used for It is added by 1, subtracted by 1, or cleared to "0" in accordance with the processing executed in the electrical control processing. Therefore, in the general-purpose electric power control process in each processing cycle, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the general electric power counter.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp which process should be executed as the general electric power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. Therefore, processing can be simplified.

Below, using the general electric power counter and general electric power address table, general electric power fluctuation start processing, general electric power fluctuation processing, general electric power confirmation processing, general electric power opening processing, and general electric power closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be explained.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, after executing the process in step S404, in step S405, a process for setting a zero flag on the general figure side is executed. In the process of setting the zero flag on the general purpose side, the numerical information of the general purpose electric timer counter is read out, and when the numerical information of the general purpose electric timer counter is "0", the general purpose electric power installed in the register of the main side CPU63 is read. Execute the process of setting the zero flag on the diagram side to "1". The general-purpose electric power timer counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the update timing of the general electric power counter according to the passage of time, and numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time is stored in step S407. - It is set in each process of step S411, and the numerical information is updated in the timer update process of step S212 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the following step S406, a process of jumping (transferring) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the normal figure fluctuation start process in step S407, and when the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the normal figure fluctuation process in step S408. If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to step S409 for determining the general power supply, and if the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to step S410 for the general power disconnection process, If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to step S411, which is processing during power outage. Then, after executing any of the processes from step S407 to step S411, the present general public electric power control process ends. The processes of steps S407 to S411 will be individually explained below.

First, the ordinary figure fluctuation start process (step S407) in the ordinary figure general electricity control process (FIG. 20) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed by the main CPU 63.

In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, first in step S601, by referring to the high frequency flag provided in the main side RAM 65, it is determined whether or not it is the high frequency support mode. If the high-frequency flag is set to "1" in step S601 and the mode is high-frequency support mode, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the indefinite flag is set to "1". As already explained, if the indefinite flag is set to "1", it means that it is a low winning, high probability jackpot winning or a most advantageous jackpot winning, and the high frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. means.

If the indefinite flag is not set to "1" in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the value of the number of games counter is "0". If the value of the number of games counter is "0" in step S603, it means that the reference number of times for ending the high-frequency support mode has been reached. In this case, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0" in step S604. As a result, the support mode of the general electric utility object 34a shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the general utility grid fluctuation start process is performed in a situation where the numerical information of the general utility grid counter corresponds to the normal electricity opening process or the general electricity closing process, that is, when the general electricity transfer is won. It is not executed while the object 34a is opening/closing. Therefore, even if the game round of the end standard number of times ends while the opening/closing operation based on the general electricity opening winning being achieved before the end of the game round of the end standard number of times ends, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode. After the opening/closing operation of the utility appliance 34a is completed, the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S605, an external output setting process for high-frequency cancellation is executed. In the external output setting process, data is set in the main side RAM 65 so that the output of high-frequency signals from the external terminal board 97 (FIG. 2) to the management computer of the gaming hall is stopped. Output of the high-frequency signal is started when transitioning to high-frequency support mode. Incidentally, the output stop of the high-frequency signal is executed in the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

After making a negative determination in step S601, after making an affirmative determination in step S602, after making a negative determination in step S603, or after executing the process of step S605, in step S606, the general map side It is determined whether the total number NS of pending information is 1 or more. Then, if the total number NS of pending information on the general map side is "0" (step S606: NO), the main general map fluctuation start process is immediately terminated, and if it is 1 or more (step S606: YES). The process advances to step S607.

In step S607, a general electricity opening lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the general electricity opening lottery has been won, which involves performing the opening/closing operation of the general electricity accessory 34a, and the present general electricity map fluctuation start process is ended. Here, the general electricity release lottery process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the common map opening lottery process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the general electricity release lottery process, first in step S701, a shift process of the general electricity reservation area HA (FIG. 13) is executed. In this shift process, the random number for release stored in the first general power holding area HA1 (FIG. 13) of the general power holding area HA is shifted to the general power holding area HB (FIG. 13), and after the shift, the first general power holding area HA1 (FIG. 13) is 1 Clear general electricity reservation area HA1. In addition, second general electric power holding area HA2 (Fig. 13) → first general electric power holding area HA1, third general electric power holding area HA3 (Fig. 13) → second general electric power holding area HA2, fourth general electric power holding area HA4 ( The random number for release in each area is shifted as shown in FIG. 13) → third general electricity reservation area HA3.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1". If the high frequency flag is set to "1" (step S702: YES), the opening/closing is performed in step S703. Determine whether or not it is in execution mode. If a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process advances to step S704.

In step S704, the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 (FIG. 14(a)) is read out from the main side ROM 64, and in step S705, a regular ticket validity determination process (general ticket opening lottery) is performed. In the general electricity release lottery, if the random number for release stored in the general electricity execution area HB matches any of the winning determination values stored in the low frequency winning judgment value table T1, the general electricity release is won. In addition, if it does not match any of the winning determination values, it will be a lost result.

In the following step S706, it is determined whether or not the result of the general-purpose map propriety determination process in step S705 is a general-purpose power open winning. If the result of the ordinary map propriety determination process is that the ordinary electricity opening is won (step S706: YES), it is determined in step S707 whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1". If "1" is not set in the high frequency flag and the mode is low frequency support mode (step S707: NO), it is determined in step S708 whether "1" is set in the consecutive winning flag. do. Here, the continuous winning flag is a flag for recognizing that it is a continuous winning period in the low frequency support mode, and is provided in the main side RAM 65 (FIG. 12).

The main side RAM 65 is provided with a successive winning counter for keeping track of the number of consecutive winnings of general electricity release during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) recognizes that the continuous winning period has started when the value of the continuous winning counter becomes "3", and sets the continuous winning flag to "1".

If the consecutive winning flag is not set to "1" in step S708, "1" is added to the consecutive winning counter in step S709, and the value of the consecutive winning counter is determined to be "3" in step S710. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the continuous winning counter is "3" (step S710: YES), it is determined that the continuous winning period has started.

In this case, the successive winning counter is cleared to "0" in step S711, and the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" in step S712. As a result, the update of the initial value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4 is postponed at the first initial value update timing of the general electric utility object opening counter C4 after the current consecutive winning period occurs. Then, in step S713, the continuous winning flag is set to "1" to memorize that it is the continuous winning period.

If the winning result is a failure in the ordinary map validity determination process (general electricity open lottery) in step S705 (step S706: NO), the successive winning counter is cleared to "0" in step S714, and the successive winnings counter is cleared to "0" in step S715. Clear the flag to "0". Therefore, during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, if the general power open winning occurs only once or happens twice in a row after the game ball B1 enters the second through gate 39, Even in this case, it is not determined that the continuous winning period has started.

If a negative determination is made in step S703, the high-frequency support mode is in effect and the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress. Therefore, in step S716, the high-frequency winning determination value table T2 (FIG. ) is read out, and in step S717, the normal pattern validity determination process is performed in the same manner as in step S705. In the utility map validity determination process, if the random number for release stored in the utility grid execution area HB matches any of the winning determination values stored in the high-frequency winning determination value table T2, the utility grid is released. If it is a winning result and it does not match any of the winning determination values, it will be a losing result.

After determining in step S707 that the mode is high-frequency support mode, determining in step S708 that the continuous winning period has already started, and determining that the value of the continuous winning counter is "2" or less in step S710. , after setting the successive winning flag to "1" in step S713, after clearing the successive winning flag to "0" in step S715, or after executing the normal pattern validity determination process in step S717, in step S718. , reads out the normal figure fluctuation time stored in the main side ROM 64. The main side ROM 64 stores in advance information that sets the normal pattern fluctuation time to 0.5 sec.

In the subsequent step S719, the information on the general figure fluctuation time read out in step S718 is set in the general figure general electric timer counter, and in step S720, processing is performed to start the variable display of the general figure display section 38a (FIG. 3). Execute. Then, in step S721, by adding "1" to the numerical information of the general-purpose electric power counter, the numerical information of the ordinary electric power counter is updated from "0" to "1", and this general electric power fluctuation start process is performed. end.

As already explained, even if the general electricity release election occurs three times in a row in the high-frequency support mode, "1" may be set in the send-off flag 65d after the three consecutive general electricity release elections. If it is determined in step S707 that the mode is high-frequency support mode, the processes in steps S708 to S713 are not executed.

Next, the ordinary figure fluctuation process (step S408) in the ordinary figure electric power control process (FIG. 20) will be explained. In the ordinary figure fluctuation processing, first, by referring to the zero flag, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the pattern to be displayed on the general pattern display section 38a is updated to the next sequential pattern, provided that it is the timing to update the display contents of the general pattern display section 38a. do. On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, a pattern stop process for displaying the current final stop symbol is executed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. In the picture stop processing, information on the final stop time is set in the general figure/general electric timer counter. After executing the pattern stop process, the general figure/general electric counter is updated from "1" to "2".

Next, the regular map determination process (step S409) in the regular map regular electricity control process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. In the regular map determination process, first in step S801, it is determined whether or not the final stop time set in the regular map power timer counter in the general map fluctuation process has elapsed. Specifically, in this determination process, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is set to "1".

If the final stop time has not elapsed (step S801: NO), the process for finalizing the regular map is ended, and if the final stop time has elapsed (step S801: YES), the process returns to step S802. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the general electricity opening lottery that triggered the current variable display is a general electricity opening lottery. If it is the general electricity release election (step S802: YES), the process advances to step S803.

In step S803, a general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "5", and in step S804, a general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM65 is set to "10". The general power opening counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of openings of the general power accessory 34a in the current opening/closing operation of the general power accessory 34a on the main side CPU 63, and the general power winning prize counter is the counter for the current general power accessory 34a to be opened. This is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the upper limit number of winnings have been made to the second operating port 34 during the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing operation of the second operating port 34a. Thereafter, in step S805, the winning counter during support is cleared to "0", and in step S806, numerical information of the open duration time (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the general electricity timer counter.

In the following step S807, by adding "1" to the general-purpose electric power counter, the numerical information of the ordinary electric power counter is updated from "2" to "3", and this general electric power fluctuation start process is ended. .

In addition, in step S802, if the result of the general electricity opening lottery that triggered the current fluctuation display is not a general electricity opening lottery, in step S808, the numerical information of the general electricity distribution counter is set to "0". After clearing, the processing during confirmation of this general map is ended.

Next, the general electric power opening process (step S410) in the general electric power control process (FIG. 20) will be explained. In the general electricity opening process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the general electricity accessory 34a, and if it is not the closing timing, the general electricity accessory 34a is maintained in the open state. On the other hand, when it is the closing timing of the general electric utility object 34a, a process for bringing the general electric utility object 34a into a closed state is executed. In this case, update the value of the general electricity release counter by subtracting "1", and if the value of the general electricity release counter is "0", clear the numerical information of the general electricity release counter to "0". Then, the opening/closing operation of the utility appliance 34a is completed. Further, when the support end flag is set to "1", it means that the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 has already reached the upper limit number of times. In this case, the general electric power opening counter and the support end flag are cleared to "0", and the numerical information of the general electric power counter is cleared to "0", and the opening/closing operation of the general electric utility accessory 34a is ended. In addition, if the numerical information of the general utility facility opening counter is ``1'' or more and the support end counter is not set to ``1'', the information on the closing time of the general utility facility 34a is At the same time, the electric timer counter is set and the electric power counter is updated from "3" to "4".

If the opening/closing operation of the utility appliance 34a reaches the standard number of times, or if the number of wins to the second actuation port 34 that occurred during the current support period reaches the upper limit, the current support period ends. finish.

Next, the general electric power closed processing (step S411) in the general electric power electric utility control process (FIG. 20) will be explained. In the general electricity closing process, a process is executed to maintain the closed state of the general electricity accessory 34a and to open the general electricity accessory 34a again when the closing time has elapsed. Specifically, the information on the open duration time for high frequency is set in the regular/unused electricity timer counter, and the ordinary/unused electricity counter is updated from "4" to "3".

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the A configuration for specifying whether or not the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 will be described. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as a 9-bit parallel interface so that nine types of signals can be handled simultaneously. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored in accordance with the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 8th bit D8. In addition, more than 10 types of signals will be input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the number of signals input at the same time to nine types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the 8th bit D8 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first gate detection sensor 49a. Information corresponding to the detection signal from the two-gate detection sensor 50a is stored.

When each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a does not detect the passage of the game ball B1, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not being detected as a detection signal, and detects the passage of the game ball B1. If so, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving a LOW level signal, and stores "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving a HI level signal. Stores information about. In other words, in a situation where the passing of the game ball B1 is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball B1 is stored in the corresponding bit. In a situation where passage is detected, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information of "0" to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S901: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S902), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S903). . The first output flag is used to specify that the main CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a to the management IC 66. This is the flag. The 10 award balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls B1 should be executed. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the 10 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which the information of "0" is stored to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S904: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S905), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S906). . The second output flag is used to specify that the main CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a to the management IC 66. This is the flag.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S907: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S908), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S909). . The third output flag is used to specify that the main CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a to the management IC 66. This is the flag.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the special electric detection sensor 45a detects one game ball B1. is detected (step S910: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S911), the fourth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S912), and The value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S913). The special electric winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric line control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric prize winning flag, one game ball B1 is sent to the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that the ball has entered, and the remaining number of balls that can enter the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. be. The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the 15 game balls B1 should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the 15 prize balls are also output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S914: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S915), and the fifth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S916). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S917). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric control process (step S215), it is confirmed that the first action winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first action winning flag is cleared to "0". . The fifth output flag is used to specify that the main CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a to the management IC 66. This is the flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball B1 should be paid out. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball B1 is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S918: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S919), and the sixth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S920). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S921). The second operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric control process (step S215), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". . The sixth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. This is the flag.

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the exit detection sensor 48a detects one game ball. It is determined that B1 has been detected (step S922: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S923). The seventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. It is.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first gate detection sensor 49a detects one game It is determined that the ball B1 has been detected (step S924: YES). In this case, the first gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S925). The first gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. In the general power supply control process (step S216) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), as already explained in FIG. 21, by confirming that the first gate winning flag is set to "1" , on the condition that the number of pieces of hold information on the general use side stored in the general electric power holding storage area 65c is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces, the numerical information of the current general electric utility goods release counter C4 is stored on the general electricity supply side. A process is executed to store it in the general electricity reservation storage area 65c as the side reservation information. When it is confirmed that the first gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general electricity supply control process (step S216), and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first gate winning flag is set to "0". "clear.

When it is confirmed that the 8th bit D8 has changed from the situation where the information "0" is stored to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the second gate detection sensor 50a detects one game. It is determined that the ball B1 has been detected (step S926: YES). In this case, the second gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S927). The second gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39. In the general power supply control process (step S216) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), as already explained in FIG. 21, by confirming that the second gate winning flag is set to "1" , on the condition that the number of pieces of hold information on the general use side stored in the general electric power holding storage area 65c is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces, the numerical information of the current general electric utility goods release counter C4 is stored on the general electricity supply side. A process is executed to store it in the general electricity reservation storage area 65c as the side reservation information. When it is confirmed that the second gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general electricity supply control process (step S216), and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second gate winning flag is set to "0". "clear.

Note that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is activated at a 4 msec cycle as already explained, so when one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a starts detecting one game ball B1, the corresponding entry In a situation where the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a continue to detect that one game ball B1, the main side is to identify that one game ball B1 has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a. This is performed by the CPU 63. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of the processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 27.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU92 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM93, a payout side RAM94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the payout side ROM 93. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball B1 is in a state where it can be normally paid out, and if it is determined that it is not possible to pay out the game ball B1 normally, the payout side RAM 94 To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main side CPU 63 indicating that it is not possible to pay out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls B1 is sent to the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. A notification command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 so that it is executed. The states in which it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls B1 include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls B1, and a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls B1. There is an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. are doing.

A full tank sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and cancels the state where the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank sensor. It is determined that the full tank state has been released when the tank is full.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 path leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state when the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the no-ball detection sensor, and the state where the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the no-ball detection sensor is canceled. In this case, it is determined that the no-ball state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball B1 has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 determines that the payout abnormal state is occurring when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball B1 even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball B1 is paid out. When the state in which the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is sent to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door close command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front side of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is sent to the main CPU 63 at the appropriate timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has entered the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has entered the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 28. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

First, a process for filling up the tank is executed (step S1001). In the full tank processing, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, a process is performed to stop the payout of game balls B1. It executes the process and also sends a command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game balls B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is sent to the main side CPU 63.

Thereafter, ball unnecessary processing is executed (step S1002). As already explained, the no-ball process is a process for identifying whether there is no ball or not based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and if there is no ball, stopping the payout of the game ball B1. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is sent to the main CPU 63. Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S1003). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of the game ball B1. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process is executed to enable the payout of the game ball B1, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S1004). In the front door open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of game balls B1 is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of the game balls B1, and a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S1005). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball is It executes a process to stop the payout of B1, and also sends a main body release command to the main CPU 63. Further, when the game machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of the game ball B1, and a main body close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S1006). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. After executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S1007), the payout device 76 controls the game balls B1. A payout control process for controlling payout execution is executed (step S1008). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor releases one game ball B1. When detected, the value of prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S1009).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a position in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal board 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the front door opening sensor 95 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

Specifically regarding the main body open sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branching from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be explained. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be explained.

In the external information setting process (step S220) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that the first game round has ended. Information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls B1 are sent to the gaming area PA through either the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operating port 34 are included. It is.

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S1009) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls B1 have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball B1 is paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
・Ball output rate which is the ratio of the number of game balls B1 paid out until 100 game balls B1 are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・Normal gaming state that is not in opening/closing execution mode or high frequency support mode Ball payout rate (hereinafter, this ball payout rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in opening/closing execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls B1 are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this percentage (denoted as “S”)
・BS × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34”
- The number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls B1 are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls B1 are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + S2 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34")
etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the manner in which the game ball B1 enters the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. Note that the number of prize balls is the number of game balls B1 that are paid out when one game ball B1 enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning mode of game ball B1>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Further, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of various processes being executed by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect a reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a and expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102. Note that the invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60 is formed in the board box 60a, so that the reading terminal 102 can be used for reading without destroying the board box 60a. A configuration may be adopted in which electrical connection of a reading device to the terminal 102 can be made.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be able to communicate in both directions.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. Note that the main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62 .

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and an arithmetic section. The management side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to constantly measure date information and time information, and output the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management CPU 112. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is for storing information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122p. used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained later.

The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of the game ball B1 received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be explained later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be explained. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p receives a signal to be input. When the input signal is at the LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal at LOW level in a situation where the first winning hole detection sensor 42a does not detect a new game ball B1, and the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs one game ball B1. When the game ball B1 is detected, a first signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where the second winning hole detection sensor 43a does not detect a new game ball B1, and the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs one game ball B1. When the game ball B1 is detected, a second signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When the game ball B1 is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level in a situation where the special electric detection sensor 45a does not detect a new game ball B1, and when one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. In this case, a fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in the situation where the first operating port detection sensor 46a does not detect a new game ball B1, and the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs the fifth signal of LOW level. When the game ball B1 is detected, a fifth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where the second operating port detection sensor 47a does not detect a new game ball B1, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a outputs the sixth signal of LOW level. When the game ball B1 is detected, a sixth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball B1 is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. When detected, a seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is being input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not present, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is present.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at LOW level when the mode is not high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at HI level when the mode is high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open period is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues to output the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. and output.

An output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize an opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the 16th buffer 122p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although signals from the main CPU 63 can be input to the 11th buffer 122k, 12th buffer 122l, 13th buffer 122m, 14th buffer 122n, and 15th buffer 122o, normal signals are not input in this pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, by providing the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 with more buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, It becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It has been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Specification of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the type of these signals is specified from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied, Information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, the first correspondence area 123a includes information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information about the number of game balls B1 that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). ) are also stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, the second correspondence area 123b includes information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls B1 that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). ) are also stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls B1 that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31 (10 ) are also stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 and information on the number of game balls B1 that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls B1 that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 ( 1 item) is also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and information on the number of game balls B1 that will be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34 ( 1 item) is also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is used as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them.

As described above, the configuration is such that the management CPU 112 specifies what kind of signals are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. , it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of signal is recognized in advance. Information for the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. The configuration is as follows. As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the main It becomes possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Additionally, the management CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o when supply of operating power is started. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p can be specified for the output instruction signal to be used reliably not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It becomes possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a 1 byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence relationship information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of this pachinko machine 10), First, the date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is is stored in the area for storing correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry portion corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning hole 31, so these first to third winning holes detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31 is stored in the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the mouth detection sensors 42a to 44a. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is The information about the type of ball entering part is read out from one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the information about the type of ball entering part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the open/close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 8th signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the 8th signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the termination information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at LOW level when it is not in high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the 9th signal at HI-level when it is in high-frequency support mode. , the management side CPU 112 specifies that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high-frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that. Then, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the termination information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continue outputting, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both cases where the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored in the history information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125. Further, when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125.

The history information storage area 125 stores all the history information that has occurred during that period, even if there are 10 consecutive business days in which the game ball B1 continues to be fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. Allow a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This allows all history information to be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information that specifies pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, if an opportunity arises to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage area 125 where the oldest history information is stored will be overwritten with new history information in order. Become.

Furthermore, when the reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer information of "0" is set to be written. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17).

First, a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S1101). The recognition output counter measures the remaining number of information outputs necessary for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63. As already explained, since the 15 first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized for their signal types, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, output processing of an identification start command is executed (step S1102). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the signals 122o to 122o correspond to. This reduces the number of signal paths compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S1103). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to each other such that the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer become the signal type setting target. The recognition setting for the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "12", it is a special prize winning hole. A type identification command indicating that the device is the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “11”, a type identification command indicating that the device is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out, If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "9", it is determined that it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "8", read the type identification command that indicates the opening/closing execution mode, and if the output counter for recognition is "7", it is the high frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "6", read the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14, and if the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", blank. Read the type identification command indicating that the

Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S1104). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification type command, in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification type command is started. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 assigns correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current setting target buffer among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o to correspond to the identification type command. Store information to be used.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1105), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1106). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1106: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after being subtracted by 1 is executed (steps S1103 and Step S1104).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1106: YES), output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S1107). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification end command is started, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is started. The combination of processes from step S1206 onward in the management process is executed 16 or more times before the process starts.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the types of the buffers 122a to 122o whose signal types are to be set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and thereafter the signal type is set to the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

Thereafter, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), a correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S1204). In the correspondence setting process, the currently received type identification is placed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information about the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205).

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, or if the process in step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the identification end command has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), steps S1204 and S1205 are performed. Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), the processes of steps S1207 and S1208 are repeatedly executed. In step S1207, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, although the details will be described later. In step S1208, although details will be described later, external output processing is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 35(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, and FIG. 35(d) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 35(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1204) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 35(a). Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). Thereafter, at timing t2, when the identification start command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, as shown in FIG. 35(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is being sent from the main side CPU 63, and outputs the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 34). Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 35(a). Further, at the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). Thereafter, at timing t5 when the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 35(d). In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

After that, at each of the timings from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

Thereafter, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 35(a). Further, at the timing t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). Thereafter, at timing t20 when the identification end command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 35(c). Thereafter, at timing t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

As described above, by using the ninth signal to make the management CPU 112 recognize whether or not a command is being output, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 as to when to store history information. Even in a configuration where command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths), it is clearly made clear to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S1301). The managed target counter allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not there is a managed target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. It is also a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items, including whether the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is opened or closed. Therefore, first, the managed counter is set to "10".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S1302). If it is not at the HI level (step S1302: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed counter is 4 or more, the ball entry detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed counter. - 48a is specified (step S1303).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1304). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", If the value of the counter to be managed is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the counter to be managed is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes, if it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a is determined. If it is compatible with the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to "1". 1" is set. As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 26).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S1304: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S1305). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1306).

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1307). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "2", the high It is determined whether a shift to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has entered the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S1308).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1309). Specifically, if the value of the counter to be managed is 4 or more and the current target to be managed is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is It is determined whether a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S1007) of the management process (FIG. 34) in the management CPU 112, and the output of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably identify the state. In addition, if the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and if the value of the managed target counter is "2" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1309: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1310).

If a negative determination is made in step S1304, if the process of step S1306 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1307, if the process of step S1308 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1309, or if a negative determination is made in step S1309, or When the process of S1310 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1311). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S1312). If the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S1312: NO), the processes from step S1302 onwards are executed for the managed target corresponding to the new managed target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1401). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S1401, "10" is set in the counter to be checked. do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1402). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the 10th buffer 122j is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1403). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1404). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1403 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the 10th correspondence area 123j is the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

When the writing process is executed as described above, and the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored. The combination of correspondence information indicating that the information is either one of the above is stored as history information. In addition, if the value of the counter to be checked is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the start information and the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1405). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, or if the process in step S1405 is executed, the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked indicate whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level. It is determined whether correspondence relationship information to be checked is stored (step S1406). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j are displayed. Since either the information indicating that there is a door frame 14 or the information indicating that it is a front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether the input signal from the main CPU 63 has been input to the buffer, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1407). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, the RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S1403 (step S1408), and further writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1409). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1408 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, if the value of the counter to be checked is in any of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. A combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, and termination information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125. The state will be as follows. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is performed in the same manner as step S1405 (step S1410).

If a negative determination is made in step S1406, if a negative determination is made in step S1407, or if the process in step S1410 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1411). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1412). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S1412: NO), the process from step S1402 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38(a) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 38(b) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 38(c) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 38(d) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 38(e) shows the writing timing of history information to the history memory 117.

At timing t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIG. 38(a). Therefore, at the timing of t1, history information is written into the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 38(e). Thereafter, at timing t2, the signal that was switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level, as shown in FIG. 38(a). However, the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the switching of the LOW level is not stored in the history information. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

Thereafter, at each of timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, the first to seventh buffers 122a The output state of the signal input to any of the signals 122g to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 38(e).

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the timing t4 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 38(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the timing t8 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also included in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has hit a field is in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 38(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the timing t12 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the one or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the front door frame 14 is when the front door frame 14 is being opened.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 17).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S1501). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when receiving the connection signal through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, this data output processing is immediately terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Therefore, in order to output the historical information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . The power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back of the back pack unit 15. It is necessary to open the game machine main body 12 and expose the back side of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, in order to output history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the game hall manager to read the history information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 102, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is confirmed to be It is determined whether the control information (program and data) confirmation is supported (step S1502). The reading device is configured to be able to confirm both control information and history information, and if confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, the reading device can confirm the control information. A signal is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are separate. In this case, if a reading device for checking the control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading device for checking the history is sent to the reading terminal 102. If the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1503). In the output processing, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and confirm whether the control information is genuine or normal. It becomes possible to do this.

If a negative determination is made in step S1502, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1504). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be explained in detail later.

When the process of step S1503 is executed, or when the process of step S1504 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S1505). If the process is being continued (step S1505: YES), the process continues to wait in step S1505. This makes it possible to prevent the processing that is set after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. If the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S1505: NO), this data output processing ends.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1601: YES), processing for outputting history information from step S1602 onwards is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the output port 24a is stored, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1602). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the general winning hole 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball enters the general winning hole 31. The number is calculated (step S1603). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number is calculated (step S1604). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information about the first actuation port 33 is stored. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1605). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the second actuation port 34 is stored. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1606).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 where the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and the end information are stored, the exit that occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be detected. 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning hole 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating hole 33, and second operating hole 34 is calculated (step S1607). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored; The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where is stored, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1602 to S1607 (step S1608). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1607, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1602 to S1606. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1607 and the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1602 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, and the difference between the number of balls entering the exit port 24a calculated in step S1603 and the number of balls entering the exit port 24a calculated in step S1607 is defined as the difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1607. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning hole 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference between the number of entered balls in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of entered balls calculated in step S1604 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1607 and the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1605 is defined as the number of balls entering K4, and the difference in the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1606 is calculated in step S1607. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entering K5.
- First parameter: Total number of paid out game balls B1 (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "First operating opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio shall be “D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning hole 31 K2/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Third parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning slot 31 (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering K3/total number of game balls B1 ejected from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) 4th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering first operating port 33 K4/ Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) ejected from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
・Fifth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3") do)
・Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of paid out game balls B1 (K2 x " ``Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31'' + K3 x ``Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32'' + K4 x ``Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating opening 33'' + K5 x ``Second operating opening 8th parameter: K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special winning slot 32") ``Number of prize balls for winning a prize'' + K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32'' + K4 x ``Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33'' + K5 x ``Prize for winning into the second operating port 34'' After that, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is necessary to extract all the history information that is the target of calculation this time. The total time spent is calculated (step S1609). Then, first output processing is executed (step S1610). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1608 are sequentially outputted to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1609 is outputted to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the first output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information, and the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode exists. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the end information is stored, the out exit 24a and the general winning opening 31 that have occurred in the opening/closing execution mode are , the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1611). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information are stored, and correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, and correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled as being in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1611, the out exit 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1612). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as in step S1607, except that the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1611 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1611 and S1612 (step S1613). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1612, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1611. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1612 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1612 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1611 is the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1612. The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1612. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1612 is defined as the number K13 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1611 is defined as the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1611. The number of balls entered is K14, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1612 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1612 is set as the number K15 of entering balls.
- 11th parameter: Total number of paid out game balls B1 (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "First operating opening 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio shall be “D11”)
- 12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning slot 31 K12/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) - 13th parameter: Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning slot 31 Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering K13/total number of game balls B1 discharged from gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) 14th parameter: Total number of entering game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 K14/ Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ejected from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・Fifteenth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K15/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13") do)
- 16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- 17th parameter: (K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of paid out game balls B1 (K12 x ""Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating opening 33" + K15 x "Second operating opening 18th parameter: K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the special winning slot 32") ``Number of prize balls for winning a prize'' + K13 x ``Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32'' + K14 x ``Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33'' + K15 x ``Award for winning in the second actuation port 34'' After that, the second output process is executed (step S1614). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1613 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and termination information are stored, the output 24a, general The number of balls entering each of the winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 is calculated (step S1615). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the system is in high-frequency support mode are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where , correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode are stored All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information is stored is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period in the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1615, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that occur when the front door frame 14 is in an open state. and the number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 (step S1616). The method for calculating the number of balls entered is the same as in step S1607, except that the period of high-frequency support mode specified in step S1615 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1615 and S1616 (step S1617). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1616, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1615. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1616 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1615 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1615 is The difference between the number of balls entered in the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1616. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1616 is the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1615. The number of balls entered is K24, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1616 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1615 is set as the number K25 of entering balls.
- 21st parameter: Total number of paid out game balls B1 (K22 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "First operating opening 33" + K25 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio shall be “D11”)
・22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning slot 31 K22/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering K23/total number of game balls B1 ejected from gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering first operating port 33 K24/ Ratio of the total number (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) of game balls B1 ejected from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
・25th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K25/total number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23") do)
・26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
Thereafter, third output processing is executed (step S1618). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1617 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. After that, clearing processing is executed (step S1619). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the general electricity open lottery, the winning target period for general electricity open winning is set to occur at 1-sec intervals. In addition, the random number for opening used in the general electricity opening lottery is numerical information that is incremented by 1 every time it is updated, and is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value, and the initial value every time it goes around. is the numerical information that is updated. Further, the game board 24 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 180 that discharges the game balls B1 toward the first through gate 35 at 1-sec intervals. Therefore, if the winning timing for the first through gate 35 deviates from the winning period, there will be a continuous non-winning period in which there are consecutive losing results in the general electricity open lottery. Furthermore, if the winning timing for the first through gate 35 and the winning target period overlap, it becomes a continuous winning period in which the general electricity opening winnings are consecutive in the general electricity opening lottery. The transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period is performed without prior notification to the player. In this way, by making the player always look forward to a continuous period of winnings that may occur at any time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and provide innovative performances.

The initial value counter C5 for opening for updating the initial value of the general utility goods opening counter C4 has numerical information updated by adding "1" every time the update timing is reached, and the numerical information is the maximum value. This is a loop counter that is cleared to "0" when . The random number initial value update process for updating numerical information in the initial value counter C5 for release is executed in the remaining process of the main process which is executed non-regularly, and also in the timer interrupt process which is executed periodically. This is the configuration that will be used. For this reason, in updating the initial value of the general utility utility release counter C4 that is periodically performed, it is possible to avoid biasing the numerical information acquired from the initial value counter for release C5. Thereby, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to cause a transition from a continuous non-winning period to a continuous winning period to occur at a timing that is difficult for the player to guess and at an appropriate frequency.

When there is a transition from a continuous non-winning period to a continuous winning period, the update of the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 is postponed once during the continuous winning period. Therefore, the initial value update interval during the winning consecutive period is longer than the initial value updating interval during the non-winning consecutive period. By lengthening the duration of the winning consecutive period without reducing the frequency with which the winning consecutive period occurs, it is possible to make the winning consecutive period a period that is advantageous and attractive to the player. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the continuous winning period and improve the interest of the game.

The possibility that a general electricity release election will occur in the low-frequency support mode, which is a combination of the consecutive non-winning period and the continuous winning period, is lower than the possibility that the general electricity release election will occur in the high-frequency support mode. However, if there is a transition from a continuous non-winning period to a continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the possibility that the general electricity release election will occur is higher than the possibility that the general electricity release election will occur in the high-frequency support mode. It gets expensive. In the low-frequency support mode, by configuring a configuration that does not notify the player of the timing of transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period, the power grid is released in the low-frequency support mode that combines the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period. While the probability of winning is lower than the probability of winning the general electricity release in the high-frequency support mode, the player's expectations for the general electricity release winning in the low-frequency support mode are increased, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of children.

The rotating body 183 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is configured to generate a plurality of timings at which the captured game ball B1 can be ejected toward the first through gate 35 while the rotating body 183 rotates once. By reducing the angle at which the rotating body 183 must rotate before ejecting the game ball B1, the state in which the rotating body 183 can take in the game ball B1 can be continued for a long time. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down near the upstream side of the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be taken into the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183. It is possible to prevent the game balls B1 that are periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from missing, and to avoid missing the timing of the general power open winning during the continuous winning period.

The concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 have a shape that becomes wider toward the outer edge. Furthermore, only the fourth recessed portion 183e has a slightly smaller size than the other recessed portions 183b to 183d. The distance from the discharge position in the adjustment mechanism 180 to the first through gate 35 is longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the discharge start position and discharge direction of the game balls B1 discharged from the concave portions 183b to 183e may shift to the left, and the game balls B1 may come off the first through gate 35. If all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 enter the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player focuses only on the intake of the game balls B1 into the adjustment mechanism 180 and does not pay attention to the ejection. On the other hand, by configuring a part of the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 to be removed from the first through gate 35, the player's interest is drawn until the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, and the player can continue playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

By setting the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to a position shifted to the right from directly below the center of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and then discharged. This configuration shortens the time it takes to complete the process. By shortening the time required for the series of steps of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game balls B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest will shift elsewhere during the series of steps. .

The game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and conveyed from the upper part to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 comes into contact with the ejection right side surface 181g of the ejection protrusion 181e. Since the ejection protrusion 181e is fixed to the accommodating part 181, the game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e and conveyed at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is on the left side of the ejection right side surface 181g. cannot be moved. The game ball B1 is ejected downward from a certain ejection position. In this way, the configuration is such that the game ball B1 that fails to be ejected at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 and the game ball B1 that has not been ejected is not transported to the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 again. Therefore, failure to eject the game ball B1 continues in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the same game ball B1 continues to rotate within the adjustment mechanism 180, and the taking in and ejection of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is not delayed.

Game balls B1 that were ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 and entered the first through gate 35, game balls B1 that were ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 and came off the first through gate 35, and game balls that were not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185. The game ball B1 that enters the escape passage 172 is configured to be able to win either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 afterwards. For this reason, even if the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, the number of game balls B1 heading toward the second operating port 34 is insufficient when a continuous winning period occurs in the low-frequency support mode. Never.

The circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 located above the rotating body 183 are configured to slope downward toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is not taken in around the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is guided by the slope of the circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade parts 188 to 191, and is placed behind the intake port 185. Move to the passage entrance 171 of the escape passage 172. As a result, the number of game balls B1 that are not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 may be reduced by the game balls B1 that are not taken in remaining near the intake port 185 or by disturbing the flow of game balls B1 upstream of the intake port 185. This can be prevented from decreasing. It can be avoided that the frequency with which game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 decreases and the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 weakens.

The acrylic plate 172a fixed in front of the escape passage 172 and the adjustment mechanism 180 present in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent. Therefore, the player can visually check where the game ball B1 goes after it enters the passageway entrance 171. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of game balls B1 that can be grasped by the player from being interrupted midway.

At the passage outlet 173 of the escape passage 172, there are a game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 toward the front of the surface of the game board 24, and a game ball B1 flowing down ahead of the surface of the game board 24. An exit roof 174 is provided to prevent collisions at the exit of the escape passage 172. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball B1, which was about to be ejected forward from the escape passage 172, returns to the inside of the escape passage 172 due to a collision at the passage exit 173.

The front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotary body 183 and the upright wall side end surface 182 of the intake port 185 each have a structure in which when the game ball B1 is sandwiched in the intermediate state, the rotary body 183 The configuration is such that a slope is provided to allow the game ball B1 to enter the rear passage entrance 171 using the force of rotation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 183 from being unable to rotate in a state where the game ball B1 is pinched. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a problem will occur during a game and that it will be necessary to interrupt the game and take measures to resolve the problem.

In addition, at the intake port 185, the force applied from the front surfaces 188b to 191b to the game ball B1, which is in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182, is in a downward direction. It has ingredients. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the upright wall side end surface 182 is prevented from being thrown upward, and the game ball B1 at the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is prevented from being thrown upward. It is possible to prevent the flow from being disturbed. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game balls B1 cannot be taken in and the periodic supply of the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 is hindered.

The accommodation portion 181 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is formed with a discharge protrusion 181e for discharging the game balls B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 that has been conveyed downward as the rotating body 183 rotates is not properly discharged and the same game ball B1 continues to rotate. By preventing the frequency at which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and the frequency at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing, the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 can be maintained.

Furthermore, by reliably discharging the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which new game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from slowing down. By preventing the frequency with which game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 weakens.

Since the game ball B1 is paid out when the game ball B1 enters any of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player can The player plays the game while hoping that the game ball B1 will land in one of the balls. In this configuration, the entry of the game ball B1 into any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section) When a ball occurs, history information corresponding to it will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls B1 entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry, and this managed information can be used. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball B1 enters each history target ball entry section. Furthermore, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry units that eject the game balls B1 from the gaming area PA are subject to storage processing of historical information and are subject to management using historical information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry for any history target ball entry section using history information. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls B1 entering each history target ball entry section to the number of game balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing when the game ball B1 entered the history target ball entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp in detail the history of the game ball B1 entering the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 contains not only history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and information indicating whether the game ball B1 is in the high-frequency support mode. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not is stored. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball B1 enters the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device that is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and use the read history information to analyze how the game ball B1 enters the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is outputted to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified whether the information to be outputted from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the identification result is externally outputted through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which historical information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the historical information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the reading terminal 102 is used also, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be outputted from the outside from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, and includes a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

The main unit that executes the process for paying out the game ball B1 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into any of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the side CPU 63, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which the game ball B1 enters each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal path corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to do so.

The main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened. is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to, to the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . This allows the management IC 66 to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry area. It becomes possible to do so.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the history target ball entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is being Thereby, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence relationship information indicating the type of the history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. Thereby, using the read history information, it becomes possible to specify the manner in which the game ball B1 enters each history target ball entry section.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th , 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of calculations using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding history information corresponding to a situation where the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. In addition, various parameters are calculated corresponding to each of the opening/closing execution mode situation and the high frequency support mode situation. This makes it possible for the game hall manager and the like to grasp the manner in which the game ball B1 enters depending on each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing a clearing process for the history memory 117. As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes the subject of storage in the history memory 117, and history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it less likely to occur.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, when reading various parameters and analyzing the manner in which the game ball B1 enters the gaming area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the historical information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters. .

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and output instruction information is sent from the main CPU 63, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , various parameters resulting from the calculation are outputted to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, various types of Parameter computation and external output of various parameters as a result of the computation are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where the game ball B1 enters the ball entry part subject to history, and the processing load on the management IC 66 is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the

In a configuration in which when the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, an external output corresponding to the entry is performed through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. Ru. As a result, by using the information output externally through the external terminal board 97, the number and frequency of ball entry of the game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls B1 entering the history target ball entry section and the frequency of ball entry.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
- In the first embodiment described above, instead of the configuration in which the initial value of the general electric utility object release counter C4 is updated, a configuration may be adopted in which the driving mode of the adjustment drive section 184 is changed at a predetermined timing. If the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 is not updated, the winning period always occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. On the other hand, for example, a first rotation mode in which the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotor 183 at a first rotation speed, a second rotation mode in which the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotor 183 at a second rotation speed, and a second rotation mode in which the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotor 183 at a second rotation speed; A third rotation mode in which the rotation speed is rotated at a third rotation speed may be adopted. Here, the first rotation speed is a rotation speed that supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 0.8 seconds, and the second rotation speed is a rotation speed that supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. This is the rotational speed supplied at a period of 1 sec. Further, the third rotational speed is a rotational speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1.2 seconds.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13), instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13). When a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 uses the numerical information updated by the switching random number counter as the general electricity reservation information and transfers it to one of the general electricity reservation areas HA1~ Store in HA4. The main CPU 63 controls the adjustment drive unit 184 by executing a switching determination process that determines whether the numerical information acquired from the random number counter for switching is the numerical information to be switched stored in the main ROM 64. Determines the timing for switching the rotation mode.

The switching determination process is executed when a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode. By using the switching determination process, the timing at which the rotation mode of the adjustment drive section 184 is switched can be set to random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 sequentially switches the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184, such as first rotation mode → second rotation mode → third rotation mode → first rotation mode, every time the switching timing comes. .

Every time the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched, the relationship between the winning timing at the first through gate 35 and the winning period changes. For example, in the first rotation mode in which the game ball B1 enters a prize in the first through gate 35 in a 0.8 second cycle, if the winning timing in the 0.8 second cycle does not overlap with the winning period in the 1 second cycle, the general electricity is released. A series of losing results in the lottery. In addition, in the first rotation mode, if the winning timing of 0.8 sec period overlaps with the winning period of 1 sec period, the general electricity open win will be won at an interval of once every 5 times. Since the length of the period of the winning timing is different from the period of the winning period, the power open winning occurs at a period of 4 seconds, which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

In the second rotation mode in which the game ball B1 enters a prize in the first through gate 35 in a 1-sec cycle, if the winning timing in the 1-sec cycle does not overlap with the winning period in the 1-sec cycle, as already explained in the first embodiment above. If the 1-sec cycle winning timing overlaps with the 1-sec cycle winning target period, the winning consecutive period becomes the same as described in the first embodiment.

In the third rotation mode in which the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 in a 1.2 sec cycle, if the winning timing in the 1.2 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning period in the 1 sec cycle, the winning lottery will be held in the power distribution lottery. A series of negative results. In addition, in the third rotation mode, if the 1.2 sec cycle winning timing overlaps with the 1 sec cycle winning period, the general electricity open win will be won at an interval of once every 5 times. Since the length of the period of the winning timing is different from the period of the winning period, the power open winning occurs at a period of 6 seconds, which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

Since the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is visible from the outside, the player can check the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 during the game and know the timing at which the rotation mode has been switched. In a configuration that does not notify the player of the timing of the consecutive winning period, by making it possible to grasp the timing of switching the rotation mode, the player's expectations for the consecutive winning period are increased each time the rotation mode changes, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of children.

Additionally, in addition to the continuous winning period in which the general electricity sale winnings occur every 1 sec period in each general electricity lottery, there is also a period in which the general electricity sale winnings occur at 5-time intervals and at 4-second intervals; At the same time, it is possible to generate a period in which the general electricity open election occurs in a 6-sec cycle. By increasing the variations in the manner in which the general electricity open winning occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

- In the above-described first embodiment, instead of updating the initial value of the general electricity utility item opening counter C4, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of winning determination value tables in the general electricity opening lottery are prepared. For example, in addition to the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in which a 24 msec winning period starts at a 1 sec cycle, the main ROM 64 also contains a first winning determination value table T1 in which a 24 msec winning period starts at a 0.8 sec cycle. The value table and the second winning determination value table in which the winning period of 24 msec starts at a cycle of 1.2 sec may be stored in advance. In the first exchange table, the winning determination value is set to (200×n-5) to (200×n), and in the second exchange table, the winning determination value is set to (300×n-5) to (300×n-5). ×n). Here, the variable n in the first exchange table is a natural number from 1 to 327, and the variable n in the second exchange table is a natural number from 1 to 218.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13), instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13). When a winning occurs in the first through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 acquires the numerical information updated by the random number counter for switching, and uses the numerical information to perform the switching determination process described above. Execute. Through the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used in the general electricity open lottery is determined.

By using the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used in the general electricity open lottery can be set to random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 selects the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 → the first winning determination value table → the second winning determination value table → the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in the order of each switching timing. , switches the winning determination value table used for the public electricity open lottery.

Every time the winning determination value table used in the general electricity lottery is changed, the relationship between the winning timing at the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, if the first winning determination value table is used in the general electricity lottery and the winning period occurs at a 0.8 sec cycle, the winning timing in the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the 0.8 sec winning period. There are a series of losing results in the general electricity lottery. In addition, in the case where the first winning determination value table is used, if the winning timing of 1 sec cycle overlaps with the winning period of 0.8 sec cycle, the general electricity open winning will be made at an interval of once every 5 times. Since the length of the period of the winning timing is different from the period of the winning period, the power open winning occurs at a period of 4 seconds, which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

In the case where the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 is used in the general electricity lottery, and the winning period occurs in a 1-sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1-sec cycle, the above In addition to the continuous non-winning period already explained in the first embodiment, if the 1-sec cycle winning timing overlaps with the 1-sec cycle winning period, the continuous winning period already explained in the first embodiment Become.

In the case where the second winning judgment value table is used in the general electricity lottery and the winning period occurs at a 1.2 sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning period of the 1.2 sec cycle. , a series of losing results in the general electricity lottery. In addition, in the case where the second winning determination value table is used, if the winning timing of 1 sec period overlaps with the winning period of 1.2 sec period, the public electricity open winning will occur at an interval of once every 5 times. Since the length of the period of the winning timing is different from the period of the winning period, the power open winning occurs at a period of 6 seconds, which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

In addition to the continuous winning period in which the general electricity sale winnings occur every 1 second in each general electricity lottery, there is also a period in which the general electricity sale winnings occur every 5 times and every 4 seconds, and every 5 times and every 6 seconds. It is possible to periodically generate a period in which the general electricity open election occurs. By increasing the variations in the manner in which the general electricity open winning occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, for example, the main side ROM 64 includes a third exchange table in which the winning determination value is set to (250×n-105) to (250×n-100), and a third exchange table in which the winning determination value is set to (250×n-105) to (250×n-100). 205) to (250×n−200) may be stored in advance. Every time the numerical information in the general utility goods release counter C4 is updated once, the low frequency winning judgment value table T1 → third exchange table → fourth exchange table are used for the general electricity release lottery in the order of The table of winning determination values is switched. As a result, it is possible to shift the winning period and create a winning consecutive period and a non-winning consecutive period without changing the initial value of the general utility goods opening counter C4.

- In the first embodiment described above, the frequency with which the general power is opened per unit time during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode is higher than the frequency with which the general power is opened per unit time in the high-frequency support mode. It may also be a low configuration. Further, the frequency at which continuous winning periods occur in the low-frequency support mode may be increased. For example, in a series of opening/closing operations of the utility power accessory 34a performed by the utility power opening winning in the continuous winning period, the total time in the open state may be reduced. Specifically, in a series of opening/closing operations, a method of reducing the number of openings, a method of shortening the opening time of one time, and a method of lengthening the closed state during a series of opening/closing operations are used alone or in combination. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the general power is opened per unit time during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, in the case where general power opening wins occur consecutively during the consecutive winning period, a series of opening/closing operations based on one general power opening winning is performed, and then a series of opening/closing operations based on the next general power opening winning is performed. By using a method of lengthening the time until the event occurs, it is possible to reduce the frequency of the general power open state per unit time during the continuous winning period in the low frequency support mode.

Further, for example, by increasing the frequency at which the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 is updated, it is possible to increase the frequency at which consecutive winning periods occur in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, by configuring the initial value to be updated at the timing when the general electric utility object release counter C4 completes half a revolution, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the winning period occurs. By configuring the configuration to postpone updating the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 three times when the winning period is reached, only the frequency of occurrence of the winning period can be adjusted without changing the length of the winning period. can be increased.

It is possible to reduce the frequency with which the general electricity is opened per unit time in one continuous winning period, and to increase the frequency with which continuous winning periods occur in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode that combines consecutive non-winning periods and consecutive winning periods, consecutive winning periods can easily occur without changing the frequency of the general power disconnection state per unit time. It is possible to give an impression to the player. Thereby, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a continuous winning period, which may occur.

- In the first embodiment described above, the relationship between the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode is that the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode is longer than that in the high-frequency support mode. The relationship is not limited to the fact that winning is likely to occur. During the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, winnings for general electricity release will occur continuously in the general electricity release lottery, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning for general electricity release in the general electricity release lottery will be approximately 3/5. occurs. In the high-frequency support mode, a series of opening/closing operations in which the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec is repeated five times, triggered by one general electric power opening election. On the other hand, for example, in the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode, a series of opening and closing operations in which the general utility accessory 34a is open for 0.8 seconds and closed for 1 second is repeated three times. , it is possible to make the possibility that a prize will be won to the second operating port 34 in the high-frequency support mode higher than the possibility that a prize will be won to the second operating port 34 during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode. can. As a result, while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, expectations for winning the second operating port 34 in the low-frequency support mode will be extremely low. It can be avoided.

For example, during the consecutive winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a series of opening/closing operations in which the power utility accessory 34a is open for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec is repeated three times, thereby switching to the high-frequency support mode. The possibility that a prize will be won to the second operating port 34 can be made to be the same as the possibility that a prize will be won to the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode. As a result, even during the consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the player fires the game ball B1 while expecting to be in a state where winnings will occur at the second operating port 34 to the same extent as in the high-frequency support mode. operations can be performed.

In addition, the relationship between the possibility that a prize will be won to the second operating port 34 during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode and the possibility that a prize will be won to the second operating port 34 in the high-frequency support mode is as follows. The parameters to be adjusted are not limited to the open time of the utility appliance 34a and the number of times it is in the open state. For example, as the parameter, the probability of winning the general electricity release in the general electricity release lottery in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release in the high frequency support mode, etc. may be adjusted.

- In the first embodiment described above, there may be a configuration in which there is only one type of support mode in which the general electric accessory 34a supports the winning of the game ball B1 to the second operating port 34. Specifically, the main side ROM 64 stores only one winning determination value table in which the winning determination value that is the object of winning the general electricity opening lottery in the general electricity opening lottery is set. In the winning determination value table, (250×n-9) to (250×n) are set as the winning determining values that are subject to the general electricity open winning. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 262. In this configuration, the probability of winning the general electricity opening lottery in the general electricity opening lottery is approximately 1/25. The winning target period in which the winning determination value that is the target of the general electricity open winning continues occurs at a cycle of 1 sec and continues for 40 msec. In this configuration, there are two states: a continuous non-winning period in which the general electricity opening lottery does not result in a general electricity opening lottery, and a continuous winning period and a state in which the general electricity opening winning occurs continuously in the general electricity opening lottery. There are two possible states. Regarding the support provided by the Fukuden Yakubutsu 34a, by limiting the advantageous period for the player to only consecutive winning periods that occur without any warning, the player's expectations for the winning consecutive period can be increased, and the winning period can always be extended to the player. can be made aware of. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

- In the first embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a discharge guard part surrounding the outer edge of the rotating body 183 is also formed at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. Further, the adjustment mechanism 180 may be configured to include a discharge escape passage for allowing the game ball B1 caught when it is discharged to escape to the rear of the game board 24. Specifically, in the discharge guard section formed along the outer edge of the rotating body 183 at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, a discharge port through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed. The game balls B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 are discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard part in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

The game board 24 has a game ball B1 sandwiched between the side surface of the discharge port and one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 when being discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180, behind the front surface of the game board 24. Equipped with an escape passage for discharge. Further, a discharge passage entrance is formed on the surface of the game board 24 in the vicinity of the discharge port as an opening that allows the game ball B1 caught during discharge to enter the discharge escape passage.

The discharge escape passage communicates with the escape passage 172. The end surface on the left side of the discharge port in the discharge guard section is inclined to the left toward the rear. Therefore, if the game ball B1 is caught between the rotating body 183 and the discharge guard part when being discharged from the discharge port, the pinched game ball B1 will be removed as the rotating body 183 rotates. being pushed backwards. The pushed out game ball B1 passes through the discharge passage entrance and enters the discharge escape passage. The game ball B1 passes through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage exit 173.

By using a configuration that utilizes the ejection escape passage, even if the ejection guard section is provided at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the situation where the game ball B1 becomes stuck between the rotating body 183 and the ejection guard section can be avoided. can do. By configuring the game ball B1 to be discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard section, the game ball B1 can be directed toward the first through gate 35 and discharged.

- In the first embodiment described above, a gap is provided between the rotary body 183 and the upright walls 181c and 181d in which the game ball B1 cannot enter, and the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 from the gap is visually recognized. It may be possible. In this case, it becomes possible to use an opaque material for the rotating body 183 and the upright walls 181c and 181d. By increasing the degree of freedom in material selection, it becomes possible to select materials that suit cost and design.

- In the first embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the initial value of the utility utility product release counter C4 is updated even during the continuous winning period in the same way as during the continuous non-winning period. Specifically, in the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, even if the general electricity release election occurs three times in a row, "1" is not set in the send-off flag 65d. Therefore, at the first initial value update timing after the continuous winning period begins, the initial value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4 is updated, and the continuous winning period ends. Compared to a configuration in which updating of the initial value of the general utility goods release counter C4 is postponed during the continuous winning period, by setting the continuous winning period shorter, expectations for winning the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode can be increased. It is possible to maintain the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode while increasing the

- In the first embodiment described above, when the postponement flag 65d is set to "1", the update of the initial value of the general utility facility release counter C4, which is postponed, is not limited to one time. When the postponement flag 65d is set to "1", a configuration may be adopted in which updating of the initial value of the utility appliance release counter C4 is postponed a plurality of times. In the case of a continuous winning period, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the continuous winning period by increasing the possibility that a jackpot will be won in a winning/failure lottery and shifting to a jackpot state.

When the postponement flag 65d is set to "1", a jackpot result is obtained in the win/fail lottery, and updating of the initial value of the general utility object release counter C4 may be postponed until the jackpot state is reached. In the low-frequency support mode, when the general electricity open winning occurs three times in a row, the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", and when the state shifts to a jackpot state, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0". . As a result, the player can be sure of transitioning to a jackpot state when the consecutive winning period begins. By making the continuous winning period attractive to the player, it is possible to make the player expect a transition to a jackpot state even in the low-frequency support mode, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

If the total number of winnings in the first operating port 33 and the number of winnings in the second operating port 34 during the period when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" is counted, and the total number of winnings exceeds the standard value. The send-off flag 65d may be cleared to "0". Thereby, when the continuous winning period is reached, winnings are ensured more than the standard number of times through the operating ports 33 and 34. To make the continuous winning period attractive to players by avoiding the continuous winning period from ending with the number of winnings in actuating ports 33 and 34 being small even though the winning continuous period has started. I can do it.

The configuration may be such that the number of times the update of the initial value of the utility appliance release counter C4 is postponed is random based on the postponement flag 65d being set to "1". For example, when the initial value update timing arrives with the send-off flag 65d set to "1", a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to continue the consecutive winning period. By making the player aware of the possibility that the consecutive winning period will continue for a long time, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the consecutive winning period.

- In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the main side CPU 63 determines that the winning consecutive period has started, triggered by the occurrence of one winning in the first through gate 35 during the consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is grasped. As already explained in the first embodiment, during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the general power open winning will not occur based on winning in the first through gate 35. On the other hand, the probability of winning the general electricity lottery in the general electricity lottery based on winnings in the second through gate 39 is approximately 1/42. When the first gate detection sensor 49a detects a win in the first through gate 35 during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 sends a send-off flag 65d even based on the one win. is set to "1", and when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects winning in the second through gate 39, the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1". Therefore, even if the winnings in the second through gate 39 occur consecutively by chance, it is possible to avoid setting the send-off flag 65d to "1" based on the winnings.

- In the first embodiment described above, there are cases where instructions are given to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35, and there is also an instruction to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the second through gate 39. It may be configured such that the command may be instructed. For example, in the case of the low-frequency support mode, when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects a win in the second through gate 39, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. The audio emission control device 81 that has received the left-handed batting support command sends a command to the display control device 82 to display a graphic that prompts the player to aim at the first through gate 35 and operate the game ball launcher. It is displayed on the display surface 41a of the display device 41. Furthermore, the audio emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output a sound that urges the player to operate the game ball launcher to aim at the first through gate 35.

When the first gate detection sensor 49a detects a winning in the first through gate 35 in the high frequency support mode, a right hit instruction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 that has received the right-handed hitting support command sends a command to the display control device 82 to display a graphic that prompts the player to aim at the second through gate 39 and operate the game ball launching device. It is displayed on the display surface 41a of the display device 41. Further, the audio emission control device 81 controls the speaker section 54 to output a sound that urges the player to operate the game ball launcher to aim at the second through gate 39.

When the main CPU 63 shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 launches a game ball aiming at the second through gate 39 by transmitting the above-mentioned right-handed instruction command to the audio emission control device 81. In addition to prompting the player to operate the device, when transitioning from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the first through gate is transmitted by transmitting the above-mentioned left-handed support command to the audio emission control device 81. The player is encouraged to operate the game ball launching device aiming at 35. In this way, by informing the player of the operation mode of the game ball launcher that is advantageous to the player, even when an inexperienced player operates the game ball launcher, he or she can easily adjust the winning period, high-frequency support mode, etc. The configuration can be such that the game content can be enjoyed.

- In the first embodiment described above, when the main side CPU 63 grasps the continuous winning period, it may be configured to notify the player that it is the continuous winning period. As already explained in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 determines that a continuous winning period has started if the general electricity open winning occurs three times in a row during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode. grasp. In this case, the main side CPU 63 transmits a continuous notification command to the audio emission control device 81. The audio light emission control device 81 that has received the continuous notification command controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54, and also sends a command to the display control device 82, thereby informing the player that the continuous winning period has started. inform about something. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which direct notification is made by clearly indicating that the winning consecutive period has started and prompting the player to operate the game ball firing device aiming at the first through gate 35. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which indirect notification is performed by changing the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

Further, when the continuous winning period has started, the main side CPU 63 sends a continuous effect command to the audio emission control device 81, so that the audio emission control device 81 understands that it is the continuous winning period. may be used as The main CPU 63 sends a continuous end command to the audio emission control device 81 upon completion of the continuous winning period. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the continuous end command, it understands that the continuous winning period has ended. If the audio emission control device 81 receives a variation command and a type command from the main CPU 63 between receiving the continuous performance command and receiving the continuous end command, the audio emission control device 81 selects the winning performance for the game repeat. Change to one for continuous period.

In this way, the continuous winning period is appealed by not only the movement of the general electric accessory 34a but also the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 using notifications or performances, and the continuous winning period is used for playing games. can make an impression on people. By making the player aware of the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored in the low-frequency support mode and improve the interest of the game.

- In the first embodiment described above, the winning lottery that is triggered by winning the second operating port 34 is more advantageous for the player than the winning lottery that is triggered by winning the first operating port 33. You can also use it as Further, it may be configured such that the reservation information acquired by winning a prize at the second operating port 34 is consumed preferentially than the reservation information acquired by winning a prize at the first operating port 33. The configuration will be specifically explained below.

When a prize enters the first operating port 33, the combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the first lottery pending information to be used for the first winning lottery. be obtained. In addition, when a prize is won to the second operating port 34, the combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved for the second lottery for use in the second lottery. Obtained as information. In the reservation storage area 65a, the second lottery reservation information is stored in a different area from the first lottery reservation information. Then, at the execution timing of the winning lottery, if one or more of the first lottery pending information and the second lottery pending information are both stored, the second winning lottery based on the second lottery pending information is It is executed with priority over the 1-win lottery. If a winning lottery is made based on a prize entered into the first actuating port 33, a transition is made to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. Similarly, even when a winning lottery is won based on a prize entered into the second operation port 34, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. The types of jackpot results set in the distribution table used for the second winning lottery are more advantageous to the player than the types of jackpot results set in the distribution table used for the first winning lottery. It becomes.

In this configuration, as already explained in the first embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, and the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35 to adjust the continuous non-winning period or the continuous winning period in the low frequency support mode. Become. The possibility that winnings will occur in operating ports 33 and 34 in the low-frequency support mode, which combines the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period, is the same as the possibility that winnings will occur in operating ports 33 and 34 in the high-frequency support mode. Since the winning amount is lower than that, the player's expectation that a winning will occur at the operating ports 33 and 34 is also low. However, during the continuous winning period, the support provided by the electric utility object 34a is more likely to be performed, so that the possibility of winning the second operating port 34 increases. This configuration is such that when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33. Therefore, even in the low-frequency support mode, the player may be able to enjoy large profits due to the occurrence of consecutive winning periods. By increasing the player's expectations regarding the continuous winning period, it is possible to increase the player's expectations that a prize will be won at the second operation port 34 in the low-frequency support mode, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 210 in this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 210 showing the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 41, in the game board 210 of this embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 220 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment. The adjustment mechanism 220 adjusts the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 41, the adjustment mechanism 220 includes a rotary body 230 that transports the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 220, and a rotating body 230 that rotates. The adjustment drive section 184, which provides the driving force for the rotation and which has already been explained in the first embodiment, and the game ball B1, which houses the rotating body 230 and is conveyed to the ejection position by the rotating body 230, are rotated. and a housing 250 for preventing the liquid from being ejected outward before reaching the ejection position due to the centrifugal force of the liquid.

The adjustment mechanism 220 discharges the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35 located below the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 41, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to be greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 220 is provided at a distance from the first through gate 35 that is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Then, on the path of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35, a part of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is prevented from entering the first through gate 35. A distribution nail 271 is provided for this purpose.

The distribution nail 271 is provided so as to protrude 6 mm forward from the front surface of the game board 210. Therefore, among the game balls B1 with a diameter of 11 mm flowing down the game area PA (FIG. 3) having a length dimension of 18 mm in the front-back direction, the game balls B1 flowing down near the game board 24 collide with the distribution nail 271. At the same time, the game ball B1 flowing down near the window panel 52 enters the first through gate 35 without colliding with the distribution nail 271.

The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 220 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes a plate-shaped base body 251 used for fixing the housing 250 to the game board 210. FIG. 42(a) is a plan view of the housing 250 cut away directly above the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the game board 210 includes a fixing recess 211 that can accommodate the base body 251 without any gaps. The adjustment mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210 by nailing the four corners of the base body 251, as shown in FIG. 41, when the base body 251 is housed in the fixing recess 211. When the adjustment mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210, the front surface of the base body 251 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 210.

As shown in FIG. 41, an accommodation space for accommodating the rotating body 230 is formed in the housing 250, and the rotating body 230 is arranged at the center of the accommodation space. At the rear of the base body 251, the adjustment drive section 184 already explained in the first embodiment is arranged. The output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive section 184 extends forward from the front surface of the adjustment drive section 184 in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210.

The base body 251 is formed with a through hole (not shown) through which the output shaft 184a is inserted. The rotating body 230 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating body 230 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive section 184. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is in the driving state, the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° for 1 sec.

In the adjustment mechanism 220, by rotating the rotating body 230, the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 at the upper part of the storage space is conveyed to the lower part of the storage space. The adjustment mechanism 220 is in a state where it can eject one game ball B1 every time the rotating body 230 rotates 1/4. That is, like the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 220 can supply the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec.

By generating the winning timing already explained in the first embodiment at a 1-sec cycle, it is possible to generate a continuous non-winning period when the winning timing does not overlap with the winning period of the general electricity open lottery. , it is possible to generate a consecutive winning period when the winning timing overlaps with the winning period.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes upright walls 252, 253, and 261 for dividing a housing space in which the rotating body 230 is housed. A plurality of standing walls 252, 253, 261 are formed on the base body 251 in such a manner that they protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 251. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 exist from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. The upright walls 252, 253, and 261 are formed so as to surround the rotating body 230 at intervals from the outside of the circumferential surface of the rotating body 230. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each standing wall 252, 253, 261 is constant, and the accommodation space is divided into a circular shape by the standing walls 252, 253, 261.

FIG. 43 is a front view of a single rotating body 230 shown separated from the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 43, the rotating body 230 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member, and the circumferential surface of the rotating body 230 has four stepped portions spaced at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Here, the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the four step portions are in the order of first step surface 241a→second step surface 242a→third step surface 243a→fourth step surface 244a in the rotation direction of the rotating body 230. They are lined up like this. The four stepped surfaces 241a to 244a protrude in the radial direction of the rotating body 230, and the protruding dimensions of the four stepped surfaces 241a to 244a are approximately the same as the radius of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 43, the rotating body 230 has an inner side of the first stepped surface 241a (the side closer to the center of the rotating body 230) and an outer side of the second stepped surface 242a (the side far from the center of the rotating body 230). A second support surface 242 that connects the inner side of the second step surface 242a and the outer side of the third step surface 243a is provided. It is equipped with The rotating body 230 also includes a third support surface 243 that connects the inner side of the third step surface 243a and the outer side of the fourth step surface 244a, and also includes a third support surface 243 that connects the inner side of the third step surface 243a and the outer side of the fourth step surface 244a. A fourth support surface 244 is provided that connects the side and the outer side of the first support surface 241 .

As shown in FIG. 43, each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is a curved surface that bulges outward. In each support surface 241 to 244, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the support surface 241 to 244 gradually becomes shorter as the rotation direction (clockwise) goes from the front side to the rear side. For example, to specifically explain the first support surface 241 as an example, as shown in FIG. It is long on the side, and gradually becomes shorter toward the first step surface 241a side, which is the rear side in the rotational direction.

As shown in FIG. 41, any of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a located at the rear ends of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotational direction, and the rotating body 230 are accommodated. The space defined by the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 that partition the storage space has a shape and size that can accommodate the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left side of the circular accommodation space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261, and the lower right side of the accommodation space is partitioned by a lower right standing wall 253. The left standing wall 261 and the lower right standing wall 253 are integrally formed with the base body 251. The lower right standing wall 253 includes a rotation shaft 254 at the upper end of the lower right standing wall. The rotation shaft 254 extends forward in a manner perpendicular to the front surface of the base body 251. The upper right side of the accommodation space is defined by an upper right standing wall 252 that is an independent member that is not fixed to the base body 251. The upper right standing wall 252 is connected to the lower right standing wall 253 in such a manner that it can rotate around a rotation axis 254 up to a certain angle.

FIG. 42(b) is a front view of the housing 250 showing the area around the rotation axis 254 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 42(b), in the part where the lower right standing wall 253 and the upper right standing wall 252 are connected, on the right side of the rotation axis 254, the upper right standing wall 252 is centered around the rotation axis 254. A gap is provided to allow clockwise rotation. Therefore, when a rightward force is applied to the upper right standing wall 252 from the outside, the upper right standing wall 252 can rotate clockwise about the rotation shaft 254. On the other hand, no gap is provided on the left side of the rotation axis 254 to allow the upper right standing wall 252 to rotate counterclockwise about the rotation axis 254.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the initial state is a state in which the upper right standing wall 252 cannot rotate any further counterclockwise (to the left in FIG. 42(b)). The upper right standing wall 252 rotates clockwise up to approximately 15° to the displacement position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41 . As the upper right standing wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the displaced position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper right standing wall 252 increases.

The upper right standing wall 252 is located at the initial position when no force is applied from the outside, and rotates about the rotation axis 254 to the displacement position when a force is applied from the outside in the right direction. The upper right standing wall 252, which has been rotated to the deformed position by an external force, rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 254 due to its own weight and returns to the initial position when the external force is removed.

As shown in FIG. 41, the upper side of the accommodation space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261 and an upper right standing wall 252. Directly above the rotating body 230, the left standing wall 261 and the upper right standing wall 252 are separated, and between the two standing walls 252, 261 is an intake port 262 for taking the game ball B1 into the storage space. It becomes. In order to make it possible to take in the game balls B1 flowing down from above one by one, the width of the intake port 262 is set to be one size larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

Since the upper right standing wall 252 that defines the right end of the intake port 262 is rotatable around the rotation axis 254 from the initial position to the displaced position, the intake port 262 can be deformed as necessary. The adjustment mechanism 220 can make it easy to take in the game ball B1. The manner in which the adjustment mechanism 220 takes in the game ball B1 from the intake port 262 will be described later.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is conveyed from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 220 while contacting any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. The support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotating body 230 will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 43, the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are inclined toward the axis toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is transported while contacting any of these three support surfaces 241 to 243 will be located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA (FIG. 3). On the other hand, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined rearward toward the axis. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is transported while contacting the fourth support surface 244 is located on the rear side (base body 251 side) of the game area PA.

In this way, by making the position in the front and back direction of the game ball B1 being conveyed different depending on the support surfaces 241 to 244 that come into contact within the adjustment mechanism 220, the game ball ejected from the adjustment mechanism 220 can be adjusted. The position of B1 in the front-rear direction can be different. As already explained, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. In the middle, a distribution nail 271 is provided that protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the game area PA.

A game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while contacting the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 (FIG. 41), and is discharged. flows down the front side of the gaming area PA toward the first through gate 35.

44(a) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the window panel 52 and the game board 210 when cut directly above the distribution nail 271 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210, and FIG. ) and (d) are front views of the game board 210 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 220 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the game ball B1 flowing down the near side of the game area PA flows down in front of the distribution nail 271 without colliding with the distribution nail 271. Then, the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, as shown in FIG. 44(b).

On the other hand, as already explained with reference to FIG. 41, when the fourth support surface 244 is located above, the fourth support surface 244 is tilted downward toward the rear. The surface has an inclination. For this reason, the game ball B1 that is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while contacting the fourth support surface 244, and is discharged, passes the back side of the gaming area PA to the first through gate 35. Flowing towards. As shown in FIG. 44(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the right side of the distribution nail 271. As shown in FIG. 44(d), the game ball B1 is bounced to the right by the distribution nail 271, so it does not enter the first through gate 35.

The probability that the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 262 is conveyed to the discharge passage 264 while contacting the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 is 3/4, and The probability that the captured game ball B1 is conveyed to the discharge passage 264 while contacting the fourth support surface 244 is 1/4. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 has a probability of about 3/4 to enter the first through gate 35, and has a probability of about 1/4 to collide with the distribution nail 271 and enter the first through gate. Go out of gate 35.

Next, the configuration around the intake port 262 in the adjustment mechanism 220 will be described based on FIGS. 45(a) to 45(d). FIGS. 45(a) to 45(d) are front views of the game board 210 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 220 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 45(a), the left standing wall 261 extends to the upper left of the rotating body 230 and has an end surface 261a at the upper end. The end surface 261a has a gentle downward slope toward the left, and the right end of the end surface 261a enters the intake port 262 and comes into contact with any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. It is located below the upper end of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the game board 210, a plurality of left guide nails 291 and right guide nails 292 are provided above the adjustment mechanism 220 in order to guide the game ball B1 to the intake port 262. There is. Here, the left guide nail 291 and the right guide nail 292 are the same members as the nails 24b (FIG. 3) provided in large numbers on the game board 210.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), on the game board 210, left side guide nails 291 are arranged in a row above the left standing wall 261, and the arrangement direction of the row is downward toward the right. It is sloping. The row of left guide nails 291 guides game balls B1 flowing down from above the left standing wall 261 toward the intake port 262. Further, above the upper right standing wall 252, right side guide nails 292 are arranged in a row, and the direction in which the rows are arranged is inclined downwardly toward the left. The row of right guide nails 292 guides the game balls B1 flowing down from above the upper right standing wall 252 toward the intake port 262.

As already explained, the upper right standing wall 252 is configured to rotate in the right direction from the initial position to the displaced position when a rightward force is applied from the outside. In this configuration, the row of right guide nails 292 arranged above the upper right standing wall 252 prevents the game balls B1 flowing down from above from colliding with the upper right standing wall 252. Therefore, the rotation state of the upper right standing wall 252 does not change due to the game ball B1 flowing down from above colliding with the upper right standing wall 252 in the displaced position.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the distance from the right guide nail 292 located at the lower end of the row of right guide nails 292 to the upper right standing wall 252 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the row of right guide nails 292 and the upper right standing wall 252. On the other hand, the distance from the left guide nail 291 located at the lower end of the row of left guide nails 291 to the left standing wall 261 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game balls B1 that are guided leftward by the row of right guide nails 292 and are not taken into the intake port 262 are removed from the space that exists between the row of left guide nails 291 and the left upright wall 261. It passes through and escapes to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220.

In addition, the game ball B1 that was guided to the right by the row of left guide nails 291 and was not taken into the intake port 262 collided with the right guide nails 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 and was bounced to the left. Thereafter, it passes through the space between the row of left guide nails 291 and the left upright wall 261 and escapes to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220. In this way, by configuring the game ball B1 that was guided near the intake port 262 but not taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262 to escape to the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220, Game balls B1 can be prevented from staying near the intake port 262.

The game ball B1 flows down into the intake port 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220 regardless of the rotational state of the rotating body 230. For this reason, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 flowing down into the intake port 262 will come into contact with the front side position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 located above, and the possibility of contact with the rear side position of the support surfaces 241 to 244. There are both. Here, the front position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 refers to the front part of the support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotation direction, and the rear position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 refers to the rotation direction of the support surfaces 241 to 244. This is the rear part of the direction.

The behavior of the game ball B1 at the intake port 262 is the same regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 that the game ball B1 comes into contact with. Therefore, below, the behavior of the game ball B1 flowing down into the intake port 262 and coming into contact with the first support surface 241 will be explained as an example.

First, the case where the game ball B1 flowing down into the intake port 262 comes into contact with the rear side position of the first support surface 241 located above will be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). As shown in FIG. 45(b), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rear side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is It is shorter than the distance from the center to the upright walls 252, 253, 261. For this reason, the game ball B1 is conveyed toward the lower part of the storage space while being pushed by the first step surface 241a existing at the rear end of the first support surface 241 that is in contact with it.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 45(b) and 45(c), we will discuss the case where the game ball B1 that has flowed down into the intake port 262 comes into contact with the front side position of the first support surface 241 located above. explain. As shown in FIG. 45(c), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the front side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is It is longer than the distance from the center to the standing walls 252, 253, and 261. Therefore, at the intake port 262, the game ball B1, which is about to move rightward in response to the rotation of the rotating body 230, comes into contact with the upper right standing wall 252.

If the rotating body 230 rotates while the rightward movement of the game ball B1 is blocked by the upper right standing wall 252, the game ball B1 cannot move rightward from the intake port 262, so that the game ball B1 and the first The point of contact with the support surface 241 moves from the front side of the first support surface 241 to the rear side.

As already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 gradually decreases from the front position to the rear position of the first support surface 241. Therefore, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 gradually becomes shorter. In this case, the game ball B1 that continues to be in contact with the first support surface 241 gradually sinks downward as the rotating body 230 rotates.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the game ball B1 is located at the rear side of the first support surface 241. As already explained, when the first support surface 241 is located at the rear side position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is equal to the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, It is shorter than the distance to 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is pushed by the first step surface 241a present at the rear end of the first support surface 241 and is conveyed toward the lower part of the storage space.

Here, when the rotating body 230 rotates from the state in which the game ball B1 exists in the front position of the first support surface 241 to the state in which it exists in the rear position, the game ball B1 and the first The distance to the point of contact with the support surface 241 decreases continuously. For this reason, even if the game ball B1 is in a waiting state at the intake port 262, it is not in a state where it remains in one place but in a state in which it is always moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the game area PA (FIG. 3), a space is provided to the left of the left standing wall 261 in which the game ball B1 can flow downward. No nail 24b is placed in this space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 at the intake port 262 can pass through the space and proceed downstream of the gaming area PA.

The game ball B1 that has flown down to a position shifted to the left side of the intake port 262 comes into contact with the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261. As already explained, the end surface 261a is inclined downwardly toward the left. Therefore, the game ball B1 is guided by the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261, and flows down the space provided on the left side of the left standing wall 261.

The game ball B1 that has flowed down to a position shifted to the right side of the intake port 262 is guided by the right guide nail 292 and moves toward the intake port 262. Since the game ball B1 does not collide with the upper right standing wall 252 from above, the upper right standing wall 252 does not rotate from the initial position to the displacement position or from the displacement position to the initial position due to the game ball B1 flowing down from above. It never moves.

As shown in FIG. 45(c), when the first game ball B1 enters the intake port 262 and comes into contact with any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the second game ball When the game ball B1 attempts to enter the intake port 262, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the first game ball B1. Since the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 are present on the right side of the second game ball B1, the game ball B1 does not advance to the right but to the left.

As already explained, the right end of the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261 is located below the second game ball B1, and the end surface 261a is inclined downward toward the left. There is a space on the left side of the left standing wall 261 through which the game ball B1 can pass. Therefore, the second game ball B1 that was not taken into the intake port 262 flows down the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220.

Since the game balls B1 that have not been taken into the intake port 262 do not stay or accumulate near the intake port 262, it is possible to maintain a state in which the game balls B1 are smoothly taken into the intake port 262.

Next, a manner in which the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 262 is conveyed to the lower part of the storage space as the rotating body 230 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. 45(d). As already explained, the game ball B1 that is conveyed while contacting any one of the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 is present on the front side in the front-rear direction (on the window panel 52 side). , the game ball B1 that is conveyed while contacting the fourth support surface 244 exists on the rear side (base body 251 side) in the front-rear direction.

Except for the position in the front-back direction, the movement of the game ball B1 during transportation is the same regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 that the game ball B1 is in contact with during transportation. For this reason, the case where the game ball B1 is conveyed while contacting the first support surface 241 will be described below as an example.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), the game ball B1 is conveyed while contacting the first support surface 241 and the first stepped surface 241a. The game ball B1 being transported is in a state where a force is applied in the rotation direction from the first step surface 241a protruding in the radial direction of the rotating body 230.

As already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 is long on the front side in the rotational direction (clockwise) of each of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244, and gradually decreases as it goes to the rear side in the rotational direction. Becomes shorter. Moreover, as already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 that partition the accommodation space for the rotating body 230 is constant.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(d), the distance from any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 to the upright walls 252, 253, 261 is shorter on the front side in the rotation direction on the support surfaces 241 to 244, and It gradually becomes longer as it moves toward the rear. Specifically, the width of the space sandwiched between any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 and the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1 on the front side of the support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotation direction. It is also narrow and gradually widens as it moves toward the rear in the direction of rotation. The width of the space located approximately in the rear half of the space is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, the distance from the front surface of the base body 251 to the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), in the space sandwiched between the first support surface 241 and the upper right standing wall 252, the space on the rear side in the rotation direction has a shape and size that can accommodate the game ball B1. The space on the front side in the rotation direction is a space of a size that cannot accommodate the game ball B1. In a state where the game ball B1 is transported while contacting the first support surface 241, a space large enough to allow the game ball B1 to exist is limited to a position on the rear side of the first support surface 241.

If there is a wide space that is large enough for the game ball B1 to exist during transportation, the game ball B1 can exist at different positions even if the rotating state of the rotating body 230 is the same. In this case, even if the rotational speed of the rotating body 230 is constant and any of the step surfaces 241a to 244a are at the ejection position each time the ejection timing comes, the position of the game ball B1 at the ejection timing will be different every time. As a result, the timing at which a prize can be won at the first through gate 35 is shifted.

On the other hand, there is a limited space that is large enough for the game ball B1 to exist during transportation, and at the discharge timing when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a conveying the game ball B1 reach the discharge position, the game ball By configuring the ball B1 to be transported to a predetermined position each time, it is possible to prevent the timing at which a prize can be won to the first through gate 35 from shifting.

In addition, in a state where the game ball B1 is at the rear side position of any of the support surfaces 241 to 244, a space larger than the size of the game ball B1 exists around the game ball B1. Therefore, while the game ball B1 is in contact with the first step surface 241a, the first support surface 241, and either of the upright walls 252, 253 located on the right side, the game ball B1 is placed on the first step surface 241a during transportation. They will not be forcibly pushed or dragged while being transported.

Next, a configuration for the adjustment mechanism 220 to eject the game ball B1 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 is continuous with an accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated, and the game ball B1 that has been conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space is placed in the housing 250 located below the adjustment mechanism 220. A discharge passage 264 for discharging toward the 1-through gate 35 is formed. The discharge passage 264 has a passage cross section through which the game balls B1 can pass one by one, and is equipped with a discharge port 256 at the lower end of the discharge passage 264. The discharge passage 264 guides the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 so that the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 flows down toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the discharge passage 264 shifts the position of the game ball B1 to the left in the upstream direction, and directs the discharge direction of the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 in the downstream direction.

The discharge passage 264 is connected to the right side of the center of the accommodation space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has been conveyed clockwise from the upper part of the storage space to the lower part advances to the discharge passage 264 before the game ball B1 makes a half-circle around the rotating body 230.

The game ball B1 being conveyed by the rotating body 230 has a downward velocity component from when it is taken in at the upper part of the storage space until it makes a half-turn, and after making a half-turn, it has an upward velocity component. That will happen. Advance the game ball B1 to the discharge passage 264 at a timing before the game ball B1 being conveyed changes from a state having a downward velocity component to a state having an upward velocity component. With this configuration, the movement of the game ball B1 from the storage space to the discharge passage 264 can be made smooth.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes discharge upright walls 263 and 266 that define a discharge passage 264. The upright discharge walls 263 and 266 are formed on both left and right sides of the discharge passage 264 in such a manner that they project forward from the front surface of the base body 251 to near the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Among these, the right side discharge standing wall 266 that defines the shape of the right side of the discharge passage 264 is continuous with the lower right standing wall 253 and extends diagonally downward to the left. As shown in FIG. 41, the passage wall surface of the discharge passage 264 defined by the right side discharge standing wall 266 is a curved line that bulges diagonally upward to the left.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left side discharge standing wall 263 that defines the shape of the left side of the discharge passage 264 is designed for right side discharge so that the passage width of the discharge passage 264 is one size larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. It is formed apart from the upright wall 266. The passage width of the discharge passage 264 is set to become slightly narrower from upstream to downstream, and is approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball B1 in the downstream.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 is guided by the right side discharge upright wall 266, and advances downward while moving to the left. Specifically, the game ball B1 is mainly guided to the left in the upstream of the discharge passage 264, and is mainly guided downward toward the first through gate 35 in the downstream of the discharge passage 264. Thereby, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is suppressed from being deviated from the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left discharge standing wall 263 has a discharge protruding end 263a at its upper end that projects into the accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the discharge protruding end 263a is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the outer ends of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and the difference between the two distances is greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. It's also short. In other words, when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 approach the ejecting protruding end 263a, the distance from the ejecting projecting end 263a to the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a becomes shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. It sticks out to a certain point.

Here, the protrusion dimension of the ejection protrusion 263a is such that the ejection protrusion 263a does not come into contact with the step surfaces 241a to 244a even when the step surfaces 241a to 244a come closest. Therefore, the rotation of the rotary body 230 is not hindered by the step surfaces 241a to 244a coming into contact with the ejection protruding end 263a.

The discharge protruding end 263a guides the game ball B1 toward the discharge passage 264 by coming into contact with the upper part of the game ball B1 that has been conveyed to the lower part of the storage space by the rotating body 230. As shown in FIG. 44(b), gravity acts on the game ball B1 that has been transported to the lower part of the storage space so that it tends to fall downward. At the bottom of the storage space, there is a space that is one size larger than the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 moves downward from the state in which it is in contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 due to its own weight.

As already explained, the discharge passage 264 is connected to the lower part of the accommodation space to the right of the center. Therefore, at the stage when the game ball B1 moves from the accommodation space to the discharge passage 264, the game ball B1 has a velocity component in the left direction and a velocity component in the downward direction. Then, the game ball B1 tries to move downward due to its own weight, and also tries to move leftward by being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a that are in contact with it.

In the lower part of the storage space, when the downward velocity component of the game ball B1 is sufficiently larger than the leftward velocity component, the game ball B1 moves to the discharge passage 264 along the right side discharge upright wall 266. On the other hand, in the lower part of the storage space, when the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is large, the game ball B1 tries to move leftward away from the right side discharge upright wall 266.

On the other hand, as already explained, the ejection protruding end 263a of the left ejection standing wall 263 protrudes into the accommodation space. Then, the distance from the step surfaces 241a to 244a that push the game ball B1 to the left to the ejection protruding end 263a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 has a large velocity component in the left direction, it cannot move to the left beyond the ejection protruding end 263a.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 44(b), even if the game ball B1 is in contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244 without moving downward, the ejection protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244 are in contact with each other. The protruding position of the discharge protruding end 263a is set so that the straight line connecting the lines 244a passes above the center of gravity of the game ball B1. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is pinched in contact with the ejection protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244a, the force of the rotating body 230 to rotate clockwise will not cause the game ball B1 to be ejected. It acts in the direction of pushing out toward the passage 264.

Even if the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is large in the lower part of the storage space, the game ball B1 that is in contact with the ejection protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a is a rotating body. As 230 rotates, it moves toward the discharge passage 264. The game ball B1 is strongly sandwiched between the discharge protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and the rotation of the rotating body 230 does not stop.

Next, a case will be described in which the game ball B1 comes into contact with both of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the intake port 262. As shown in FIG. 41, the upper right standing wall 252 in the initial position includes an end surface 252a that is inclined downward and to the right at the free end of the upper right standing wall 252. As the rotating body 230 rotates, the distance between the step surfaces 241a to 244a located around the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 becomes longer or shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. do.

When the interval between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a located near the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 changes from longer to shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball is inserted into the intake port 262. When B1 enters, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a.

The behavior of the sandwiched game ball B1 is the same regardless of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a that sandwich the game ball B1. Therefore, below, a case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46(a) to 46(c). FIGS. 46(a) to 46(c) are front views of the game board 210 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 220 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252, when the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise, the second step surface A rightward force is applied to the game ball B1 from 242a. Therefore, a rightward force is applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252. As already explained, the upper right standing wall 252 can rotate about the rotation axis 254 from the initial position to the deformed position shown shaded in FIG. 46(a) when a rightward force is applied from the outside. It is.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when the upper right standing wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the deformed position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 is extended, and the upper right standing wall 252 is pinched. The game ball B1 is guided by the slope of the end surface 252a and moves to the lower right. Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the game ball B1 changes from being in contact with the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 to being in contact with the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252. Here, the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 is a surface of the upper right standing wall 252 that faces the rotating body 230 and defines a space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated.

Thereafter, the game ball B1 moves along the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 while being pushed by the second stepped surface 242a. As a result, the game ball B1 that is momentarily caught in the intake port 262 can be transported to the ejection position at the same ejection timing as the game ball B1 that is not caught in the intake port 262. .

In this way, the adjustment mechanism 220 has a configuration that, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the upper right standing wall 252, removes the pinched state of the game ball B1 and takes in the game ball B1. have. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 will be pinched between the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252 and the rotating body 230 will not be able to rotate.

By moving the game ball B1 from the state in which it is in contact with the upper right standing wall 252 to the state in which it is in contact with the lower right standing wall 253, the rightward force applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252 is removed. It will be done. Therefore, the upper right standing wall 252 that has rotated to the displaced position returns to the initial position due to its own weight.

In the case of a configuration in which a force is applied to the upper right standing wall 252 using a spring or the like to return it to the initial position, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 from the initial position to the displaced position increases. On the other hand, by configuring the upper right standing wall 252 to return to its initial position by its own weight, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 is reduced, and the state in which the game ball B1 is pinched can be instantly removed. In addition, it is possible to prevent load from being applied to the adjustment drive unit 184 (FIG. 41) in the process of eliminating the situation.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

At the intake port 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 is initially It is configured to be incorporated into the adjustment mechanism 220 by rotating from the position to the deformed position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pinched game balls B1 from being repelled upward and disrupting the flow of the game balls B1 around the intake port 262. Further, compared to a configuration in which the pinched game balls B1 are released outside the adjustment mechanism 220, more game balls B1 can be taken into the adjustment mechanism 220. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the game balls B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being chipped. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of winning the general electricity opening is missed during the continuous winning period.

In the intake port 262, when the game ball B1 is located in front of the support surfaces 241 to 244 (front side in the rotation direction), the game ball B1 is located in the rear side of the support surfaces 241 to 244 (back side in the rotation direction). The game ball B1 is configured to wait at the intake port 262 while moving downward until it reaches the position. By keeping the game ball B1 waiting at the intake port 262 constantly moving, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from stopping and causing the player's attention to shift elsewhere. By avoiding a situation in which the player loses interest in the process in which the adjustment mechanism 220 takes in the game ball B1, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and improve the interest in the game. can.

The adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to take in the game balls B1 one by one from the take-in port 262. When two game balls B1 are taken in at the same time, one game ball B1 influences the winning timing of the other game ball B1, so that even if it is a continuous winning period, the first through gate 35 does not receive a prize. The possible timing may fall outside of the winning period. On the other hand, by limiting the number of game balls B1 that can be taken in at a time to one, the possibility that game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 at a timing that does not become a general electricity open winning during the continuous winning period is reduced. It is possible to reduce the probability of winning the general electricity release in the winning consecutive period and increase the probability of winning. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the continuous winning period and improve the interest in the game.

In the game board 210, a right side guide nail 292 for guiding the game ball B1 to the intake port 262 is provided above the upper right standing wall 252, and a right side guide nail 292 is provided above the left standing wall 261 to guide the game ball B1 to the left side. A gap is provided to allow movement in both directions. Therefore, when the game ball B1 already exists in the intake port 262, the other game ball B1 can be released to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220. For this reason, the number of game balls B1 that are not taken in stays near the intake port 262 or disturbs the flow of game balls B1 upstream of the intake port 262 and is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220. can be prevented from decreasing. In this way, by suppressing the game balls B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from missing, it is possible to avoid missing the timing of the general power open winning during the continuous winning period.

The adjustment mechanism 220 is provided with a discharge protruding end 263a, and at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 220, the game ball B1 is prevented from rising without being discharged. As a result, the number of game balls B1 that are conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 220 by the rotating body 230 is not properly discharged, and the same game balls B1 continue to rotate and are discharged toward the first through gate 35. can be prevented from decreasing. The frequency with which game balls B1 are ejected from the adjustment mechanism 220 decreases, and it is possible to avoid the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 from weakening. Furthermore, by configuring the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 to be discharged within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which new game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from slowing down. Thereby, the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is reduced, and it is possible to avoid the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 from weakening.

The first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are provided with an inclination for discharging the game ball B1 in a manner that it flows down the front side, and the fourth support surface 244 is provided with a slope for discharging the game ball B1 in a manner that the game ball B1 flows down the front side. It is provided with an inclination for discharging in a manner that it flows down the back side. As already explained, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, only the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and flowing down the back side collides with the distribution nail 271 and comes off from the first through gate 35. As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 enter the first through gate 35, thereby avoiding a situation where the player focuses only on the intake of the game balls B1 into the adjustment mechanism 220 and does not pay attention to the ejection. can do. By attracting the attention of the players until the moment they win the first through gate 35, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By changing the number and inclination of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the game ball B1 that is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 220 and enters the first through gate 35, and the game ball B1 that leaves the first through gate 35 can be adjusted. It is possible to set the frequency of occurrence at the design stage. Therefore, the probability that the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 220 will win in the first through gate 35 can be set to a high value other than 100%. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and improve the interest of the game.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
- In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of game balls B1 may be configured to wait while moving downward at the intake port 262. For example, one nail 24b is placed above the left end of the intake port 262, and when the first game ball B1 has already entered the intake port 262, the second game ball B1 flows down. When the game ball B1 comes, the second game ball B1 may be held above the intake port 262. The second game ball B1 is in a waiting state on top of the first game ball B1, but since the first game ball B1 always continues to move downward until it is taken in, it comes into contact with the first game ball B1. The second game ball B1, which is on standby, also keeps moving downward.

In this way, by stocking the game balls B1 while moving them at the intake port 262, there is a shortage of game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220, and even though it is a continuous winning period, the game balls B1 are in the first position. It is possible to avoid a situation where the frequency of winning through the gate 35 is low.

- In the second embodiment described above, a nail may be used instead of the housing 250 as a structure for guiding the game ball B1 that moves while being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230. As a nail placed near the intake port 262, when a rightward force is applied from the outside, the compression coil spring becomes deformed and moves to the right from the initial position, and the external force is removed. It is also possible to use a movable nail that returns to the initial position by the restoring force of a compression coil spring when the nail is moved. By using the movable nail, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotary body 230 and the movable nail, the movable nail can be removed from the center of the rotary body 230 using the rightward movement of the movable nail. It is possible to widen the distance between the ball and the ball B1, thereby making it possible to take in the sandwiched game ball B1.

In this way, the game ball B1 that moves in the rotational direction while being pushed by the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotary body 230 is guided by the nail, so that the game ball B1 can be placed in the first through gate 35 on the game board 210. The area occupied by the means for periodically supplying can be reduced. As a result, on the game board 210, the number of options for providing the means for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 is increased, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

- In the second embodiment described above, the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 may have a configuration in which they do not have an inclination in the front-rear direction. In this case, the four support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 have a common shape. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is conveyed while contacting any of the support surfaces 241 to 244, it is discharged from the discharge passage 264 in the same manner. The probability that the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 220 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA and the probability that the game ball B1 is located on the back side (the game board 210 side) are the same as the game ball B1. It is constant regardless of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 in contact.

Regarding all the support surfaces 241 to 244, there are two cases in which the game ball B1 that is conveyed while in contact is located in front of the game area PA and enters the first through gate 35 without contacting the distribution nail 271, and a case where the game ball B1 is conveyed while contacting the game area PA and enters the first through gate 35 without contacting the distribution nail 271. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which both of the cases where it comes off from the first through gate 35 by being located on the rear side of the PA and coming into contact with the distribution nail 271 can occur. Thereby, around the distribution nail 271, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball B1, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, in a configuration in which the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 do not have an inclination in the front-rear direction, the game board 210 may not be provided with the distribution nails 271. In this case, the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is not affected by the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. The ejected game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability. However, the distance from the discharge passage 264 to the first through gate 35 is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, if the passage width at the lower end of the discharge passage 264 is at least one turn wider than the game ball B1, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 may shift to either the left or right direction, and there is a possibility that the game ball B1 will not enter the first through gate 35. There is.

In this way, instead of the configuration in which the distribution nail 271 is provided on the game board 210, a configuration in which the relationship with the first through gate 35 in the discharge passage 264 is adjusted, all of the discharged game balls B1 are placed in the first through gate 35. It may be configured to avoid the situation of winning through the through gate 35.

- In the second embodiment described above, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 may have a configuration in which the distribution nail 271 does not exist in the middle of the path toward the first through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a location more than the diameter of the game ball B1 from the discharge port 256 in the adjustment mechanism 220. Therefore, depending on the ejection direction and ejection speed of the game ball B1 at the ejection port 256, the game ball B1 ejected from the ejection port 256 may come off the first through gate 35. The positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 220 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 comes off the first through gate 35. The player's interest can also be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The configuration around the first through gate 35 in the game board 320 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board 320 showing the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 47, the game board 320 includes an adjustment mechanism 330 above the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 330 discharges the game ball B1 while guiding the game ball B1 to fall toward the first through gate 35. In the adjustment mechanism 330, the timing at which the game ball B1 can be ejected occurs at a cycle of 1 sec.

By generating the winning timing already explained in the first embodiment at a 1-sec cycle, it is possible to generate a continuous non-winning period when the winning timing does not overlap with the winning period of the general electricity open lottery. , it is possible to generate a consecutive winning period when the winning timing overlaps with the winning period. The detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the distance between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to a distance that is greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the interval between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. In the game board 320, at the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and below the adjustment mechanism 330, there is a hole for removing some of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 from the path toward the first through gate 35. An adjustment nail 376 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment nail 376 is located to the left of the path of the game ball B1 that flows down from the adjustment mechanism 330 and enters the first through gate 35. Further, the adjustment nail 376 protrudes from the front of the game board 320 to near the back of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down the path shifted to the left collides with the adjustment nail 376 regardless of its position in the front and back direction in the game area PA (FIG. 3).

When the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is directly below, the discharged game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 without contacting the adjustment nail 376. On the other hand, when the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is shifted to the left from directly below, the discharged game ball B1 comes into contact with the adjustment nail 376. As mentioned above, since there is a gap greater than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the adjustment nail 376 comes off the first through gate 35. .

To prevent the movement of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 from becoming monotonous and the player from getting bored by preventing all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 from entering the first through gate 35. I can do it.

The adjustment mechanism 330 takes the game ball B1 into the adjustment mechanism 330 and guides it toward the first through gate 35, and the range in which the game ball B1 can be taken in is the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 330. It is located in As shown in FIG. 47, in the game board 320, a plurality of downstream guide nails 371 are provided upstream of the adjustment mechanism 330 to guide the game balls B1 flowing down from above to the adjustment mechanism 330.

The downstream guide nails 371 are lined up on the game board 320, thereby forming a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side of the adjustment mechanism 330 to a retrievable range of the adjustment mechanism 330. A row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side of the adjusting mechanism 330 into the retrieval range of the adjustment mechanism 330 is provided. Here, as shown in FIG. 47, the area sandwiched between the two rows on the game board 320 is defined as the downstream guide area 371a. The downstream guide nails 371 arranged in two rows guide the game balls B1 flowing down the downstream guide area 371a toward the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 330.

As shown in FIG. 47, an electric nail 361 that is movable left and right is provided in the upper vicinity of the right row of downstream guide nails 371. Further, above the electric nail 361, there is an upstream guide nail 372 for guiding most of the game balls B1 flowing down the area on the left side of the center frame 57 (FIG. 3) to the electric nail 361 on the game board 320. There are several.

Upstream guide nails 372 are arranged in the area on the left side of the center frame 57 on the game board 320, so that the game ball B1 flowing down the right side of the area can be guided by the electric motor located below at the upper part of the area. A row for guiding the ball toward the nail 361 and a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the area toward the electric nail 361 located below are provided. As shown in FIG. 47, the area sandwiched between the two columns is defined as an upstream guide area 372a.

The width of the upstream guide area 372a is wide at the upper part of the upstream guide area 372a, and gradually narrows toward the bottom. This creates an interval that allows passage.

As shown in FIG. 47, the electric nail 361 is connected to a nail drive unit 361a, which is an electric actuator such as a solenoid, via a link mechanism (not shown), and the game ball B1 guided by the row of upstream guide nails 372 It takes a permission position that allows the game ball B1 to enter between the two rows of downstream guide nails 371, and a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering between the two rows of downstream guide nails 371. Here, the relationship between the position of the electric nail 361 and the path of the game ball B1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 48(a) and (b).

FIG. 48(a) is a front view of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the electric nail 361 in the permitted position, and FIG. 48(b) is a front view of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the board 320. As shown in FIG. 48(a), when the drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is at the LOW level, the electric nail 361 assumes the permission position. The electric nail 361 in the permission position is located to the upper right of the downstream guide nail 371 located at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and the upstream guide nail 372 located at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a. It is located at the bottom left of.

First, the case where the electric nail 361 is in the permission position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the right region of the downstream guide region 371a exists below the left region of the upstream guide region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing downward from the left side area in the upstream guide area 372a enters the right side area in the downstream guide area 371a. Moreover, the electric nail 361 in the permission position exists below the right side area of the upstream guide area 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down from the right side area in the upstream guide area 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and enters the downstream guide area 371a.

Next, a case where the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position exists below the left side area of the upstream guide area 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down from the left side area in the upstream guide area 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and flows down to the right of the downstream guide nail 371. Further, the lower part of the right side area of the upstream guide area 372a corresponds to the right side of the downstream guide area 371a. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down from the right side area in the upstream guide area 372a flows down to the right side of the downstream guide area 371a.

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the distance between the electric nail 361 in the permitted position and the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a, and the distance between the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position and the upstream guide The distance from the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower left end of the region 372a is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 moves from side to side, the game ball B1 will not be pinched between the electric nail 361 and the upstream guide nail 372. Also, the distance between the electric nail 361 in the permitted position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and the distance between the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right edge of the downstream guide area 371a. The interval is so narrow that the game ball B1 cannot enter. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 moves from side to side, the game ball B1 will not be pinched between the electric nail 361 and the downstream guide nail 371.

As shown in FIG. 47, a nail 24b is provided above the left side area of the downstream guide area 371a to prevent the game ball B1 flowing down to the left from the upstream guide area 372a from entering the downstream guide area 371a. is provided. Therefore, the game balls B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a are limited to the game balls B1 flowing down from the upstream guide area 372a. In this way, the game ball B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guide area 372a, and the electric nail 361 moves to the prohibited position to prevent the game ball B1 from flowing down from the upstream guide area 372a. It is configured to be able to guide the incoming game ball B1 to the right side of the downstream guide area 371a. Thereby, the frequency with which the game ball B1 enters the downstream guide area 371a and is taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 can be controlled.

The drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is a periodic signal in which the HI level is repeated for 0.2 seconds at intervals of 0.8 seconds. Therefore, the electric nail 361 takes the prohibited position for only 0.2 seconds out of 1 second. If two or more game balls B1 that can be fired at 0.6 sec intervals from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) try to enter the downstream guide area 371a, there is a high probability that one of the two game balls B1 will One of them collides with the electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position and flows down to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. By using the electric nail 361, a plurality of game balls B1 are prevented from entering the downstream guide area 371a and being taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 in a continuous state.

Next, the detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment mechanism 330 includes a rotating body 340 that transports the game ball B1 from the top to the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 330, and a rotating body 340 that rotates the rotating body 340 clockwise. The adjustment drive unit 184 already described in the embodiment is provided on the right side of the rotating body 340, and the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 are discharged before discharge so as to head toward the first through gate 35. A guide member 350 that guides the direction is provided. The adjustment drive unit 184 provides a driving force to the rotating body 340 so that the rotating body 340 rotates once every 6 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body 340 includes a substantially disc-shaped rotating body main body 342 and six plate-shaped blade members 343 that protrude in the radial direction from the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342. ing. The rotating body main body portion 342 and the blade member 343 are resin members. The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 330 while being supported from below by one of the blade members 343 constituting the rotating body 340.

First, the configuration of the rotating body 340 in the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body main body portion 342 includes six rotation shafts 344 on its outer periphery. The rotation shaft 344 is provided at an angle perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 320. The blade member 343 is fixed to the outer periphery of the rotating body main body portion 342 in a manner that it can rotate counterclockwise about a rotation shaft 344 . The six blade members 343 are the same members having the same shape and size, and are arranged at equal intervals in the rotation direction on the outer periphery of the rotating body main body portion 342.

As shown in FIG. 47, an adjustment drive section 184 is arranged behind the rotating body main body section 342. The front surface of the adjustment drive section 184 is parallel to the front surface of the game board 320, and the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive section 184 extends forward in a manner perpendicular to the front surface of the adjustment drive section 184. The rotating body main body 342 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating body main body 342 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184. When the adjustment drive section 184 is brought into the driving state, the rotating body main body section 342 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60 degrees for 1 sec. When the rotating body 340 is attached to the game board 320, the rotating body main body portion 342 extends from near the front of the game board 320 to near the back of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

Here, the manner in which the blade member 343 is fixed to the rotating body main body portion 342 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 47, the initial state of the blade member 343 is a state in which the blade member 343 protrudes in the radial direction from the outer edge of the rotating body main body portion 342. A recessed portion (not shown) is formed around the rotation shaft 344 to prevent the blade member 343 in the initial state from rotating clockwise around the rotation shaft 344 . Even if an external force acts on the blade member 343 in the initial state to rotate the blade member 343 clockwise, the blade member 343 will not rotate because the blade member 343 is in contact with the wall of the recess. do not.

A biasing member (for example, a torsion coil spring) (not shown) is attached around the rotation shaft 344. The biasing member is in a natural state without deformation when the blade member 343 is in the initial state, and is in a displaced state when the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 344. It will be in a deformed state. The restoring force of the biasing member acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state to return from the deformed state to the natural state. When an external force is applied to the blade member 343, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise and becomes a displaced state, and when the external force is removed, the blade member 343 rotates clockwise due to restoring force and returns to the initial state. to return to.

Next, the configuration of the guide member 350 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 includes a plate-shaped base body 351. Furthermore, on the right side of the rotating body 340 in the game board 320, a fixing recess (not shown) is formed in which the base body 351 can be accommodated without any gap. The guide member 350 is fixed by nailing the base body 351 to the game board while the base body 351 is accommodated in the fixing recess. When the guide member 350 is attached to the game board 320, the front surface of the base body 351 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 320.

As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 includes an upright wall 352 that vertically projects forward from the front surface of the base body 351. As shown in FIG. The upright wall 352 extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. Further, the upper end of the standing wall 352 is located above the upper end of the rotating body 340, and the lower end of the standing wall 352 is located at approximately the same height as the lower end of the rotating body main body portion 342.

As shown in FIG. 47, the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352, which faces the rotating body main body portion 342 at a distance, is a gently arched curved surface and is concave toward the right. The distance from the rotating body main body part 342 to the standing wall 352 is set longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, the distance from the upper end of the upright wall 352 to the blade member 343 located closest to the upper end is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 regardless of the rotational state of the rotating body 340.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the adjustment mechanism 330, an area sandwiched between the rotating body main body part 342 and the upright wall 352 is defined as an adjustment area 330a. In the lower region of the adjustment region 330a, the distance from the blade member 343 to the upright wall 352 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. As already explained, the blade members 343 protrude from the circumferential surface of the rotating body 340 in the radial direction of the rotating body 340 at intervals of 60°.

Therefore, one of the blade members 343 of the rotating body 340 is always present in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a. Then, the game ball B1 flowing down the adjustment area 330a always comes into contact with the blade member 343 present in the area below the adjustment area 330a. By adopting a configuration that prevents the game ball B1 that has entered the adjustment region 330a from passing through without contacting the blade member 343, the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 can pass through the first through gate at a timing other than the ejection timing. 35 can be prevented from being discharged.

Here, the mode in which the game ball B1 is ejected from the adjustment area 330a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 49(a) to (c). FIGS. 49(a) to 49(c) are front views of the game board 320 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 330 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a, the game ball B1 is supported from below by the blade member present in the region. Then, as the rotating body 340 rotates, it is transported to a lower discharge position. The game ball B1 is conveyed in a state in which it is in contact with the upright wall 352, thereby being guided along the course of the game ball B1 in the adjustment area 330a.

Above the first through gate 35, the game ball B1, which is supported by the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352, is rotated by the rotating body 340, and as shown in FIG. When the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 that supported B1 and the lower end of the standing wall 352 becomes wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 moves from the gap toward the first through gate 35 below. and fall.

As already explained, the adjustment drive section 184 (FIG. 47) rotates the rotating body 340 at a rotational speed of one rotation every 6 seconds. Therefore, in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 330, the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 and the lower end of the standing wall 352 changes from a state shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Timing occurs in a 1 second period. In this way, the adjustment mechanism 330 is capable of ejecting the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec.

The game ball B1 entering the adjustment area 330a contacts the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 while having a downward speed. Therefore, when the game ball B1 collides with the blade member 343 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily out of contact with the blade member 343. Further, when the game ball B1 collides with the upright wall 352 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily out of contact with the upright wall 352. As shown in FIG. 49(c), when the ejection timing is reached when the game ball B1 is not in contact with the blade member 343 or the upright wall 352, the game ball B1 is ejected at a timing slightly delayed from the ejection timing. The Rukoto.

In this case, since the rotating body 340 continues to rotate from the ejection timing until the timing when the game ball B1 is actually ejected, the course of the game ball B1 after being ejected shifts to the left. As already explained, there is a space between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 that is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down the path deviated to the left collides with the upper right side of the adjustment nail 376 provided at the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and rebounds to the right. It may deviate from 35.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50(a) to (c). FIGS. 50(a) to 50(c) are front views of the game board 320 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 330 in an enlarged manner.

If the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a at a timing when the distance from the free end of the blade member 343 to the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B1, as shown in FIG. 50(a). Then, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), even when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352, the rotating body 340 continues to rotate clockwise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(b), as the rotating body 340 rotates, a force is applied to the blade member 343 to rotate the blade member 343 counterclockwise. As a result, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 344 and enters a displaced state.

A restoring force acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state from an urging member (not shown) to return the blade member 343 to its initial state. However, the restoring force of the biasing member acting on the blade member 343 in the displaced state is a weak force that allows the blade member 343 to return to its initial state when no external force is applied to the blade member 343. Therefore, the force of the displaced blade member 343 trying to return to the initial state and pushing the game ball B1 to the right is not strong enough to completely stop the movement of the game ball B1.

As the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the amount of displacement of the blade member 343 increases. During this time, the game ball B1 slowly falls downward due to its own weight. The falling speed of the game ball B1 that is in contact with the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 is slower than the speed at which the blade member 343 advances in the rotation direction as the rotating body 340 rotates. Therefore, as the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the free end of the blade member 343 will be located below the game ball B1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the force applied from the game ball B1 to the blade member 343 is released, and the blade member 343 returns from the displaced state to the initial state. The game ball B1 is transported while being supported by the upper surface of the blade member 343 which has returned to its initial state, so that it is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35 without deviation from the ejection timing of the 1 sec cycle. becomes possible.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The adjustment mechanism 330 directs one game ball B1 guided to the adjustment area 330a toward the first through gate 35 at a discharge timing of 1 sec period, regardless of the timing at which the game ball B1 is guided to the adjustment area 330a. and discharge it. Therefore, upstream of the adjustment area 330a, the game ball B1 can be ejected at the ejection timing of 1 sec period without adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a is adjusted, it is possible to generate a continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode while reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

When the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 330, if the game ball B1 is pinched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352, the rotating body 340 deforms and the game ball B1 is pinched. This configuration eliminates the current situation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball B1 becomes stuck between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352, or the rotating body 340 becomes unable to rotate, and the adjustment mechanism 330 becomes unable to eject the game ball B1. can do. This reduces the possibility that a problem will occur during a game and that it will be necessary to interrupt the game and take measures to resolve the problem.

The configuration is such that the deformation of the rotating body 340 performed in order to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is pinched is performed by the rotation of the rotating body 340. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated member in advance to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is pinched. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of members constituting the adjustment mechanism 330, simplify the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330.

The deformation of the rotating body 340 performed to eliminate the state where the game ball B1 is pinched is automatically performed in the same state as the control of the rotating body 340 when the game ball B1 is not pinched. . For this reason, the control means of the pachinko machine 10 does not require means for grasping that the game ball B1 is in a pinched state. As a result, compared to a configuration in which when the game ball B1 is pinched, the control state of the rotating body 340 is changed to eliminate the pinched state of the game ball B1, the members constituting the adjustment mechanism 330 The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330 can be reduced by suppressing an increase in the number of adjustment mechanisms 330.

An interval larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35. Further, the game board 320 is provided with an adjustment nail 376 that prevents the game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35 when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 deviates from a predetermined course. It is being Therefore, all of the game balls B1 that have entered the adjustment area 330a enter the first through gate 35, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player does not pay attention to the ejection of the game balls B1 in the adjustment mechanism 330. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by attracting the attention of the players until they win the first through gate 35.

The game board 320 includes an electric nail 361 that prevents one of the game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a when two game balls B1 consecutively try to enter the downstream guide area 371a. It is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a plurality of game balls B1 are guided to the adjustment area 330a at once.

The number of game balls B1 that can be ejected from the game ball firing mechanism 27 is one per 0.6 sec, and the number of game balls B1 that can be ejected from the adjustment mechanism 330 is one per 1 sec. Therefore, if the number of game balls B1 entering the adjustment area 330a continues to be greater than the number of game balls B1 moving from the adjustment area 330a to the adjustment area 330a, the game balls B1 will stay in the adjustment area 330a. there is a possibility. On the other hand, by using the electric nail 361 to limit the game balls B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a located upstream of the adjustment area 330a, the game balls B1 stay in the adjustment area 330a. The possibility can be reduced.

The electric nail 361 has a width that allows one game ball B1 to pass through, and is provided upstream of the downstream guide area 371a that guides the game ball B1 to the adjustment area 330a. The electric nail 361 is configured to move between a permission position where the game ball B1 is allowed to enter the downstream guide area 371a and a prohibition position where the game ball B1 is prohibited from entering the downstream guide area 371a. It is. The electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position is configured to move the game ball B1, which has been prevented from entering the downstream guide area 371a, to the right side of the downstream guide area 371a. For this reason, when the electric nail 361 takes the prohibited position, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the electric nail 361. In this way, by appropriately dispersing the game balls B1 upstream of the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls B1 from entering the adjustment area 330a in a continuous state.

<Another form of the third embodiment>
- In the third embodiment described above, the configuration that limits the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a is not limited to the electric nail 361. For example, as the configuration, an adjustment rotating body having a protrusion may be used. Depending on the rotational state of the adjustment rotor, the protrusion of the adjustment rotor may take a permission position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a, or a position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a. In some cases, the prohibited position may be taken. For this reason, the number of game balls B1 that enter the downstream guide area 371a can be limited by using the adjustment rotary body that rotates at a constant speed.

- In the third embodiment described above, the adjustment nail 376 may not exist on the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a location more than the diameter of the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 330. Therefore, depending on the direction and speed of discharge of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330, the discharged game ball B1 may come off the first through gate 35. By adjusting the positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 comes off the first through gate 35, the positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted. The player's interest can also be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the game board 420 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 430 for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be explained based on FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 420 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 430 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, an adjustment mechanism 430 is provided above the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position away from the first through gate 35 by more than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. The detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 51, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes a rotating body 440 that takes in and discharges the game ball B1, and a guide member 450 that adjusts the discharge timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the rotary body 440. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes the adjustment drive section 184 already described in the first embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 in this embodiment rotates the rotating body 440 once every 6 seconds.

First, the configuration of the rotating body 440 will be explained based on FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 52 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating body 440 and the adjustment drive section 184 when the rotating body 440 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420. As shown in FIG. 51, the rotating body 440 includes a substantially disc-shaped passage forming part 443, and the passage forming part 443 has three adjustment passages 444 having a passage width that allows the game ball B1 to pass through. ~446 are formed. The rotating body 440 takes the game ball B1 into any of the adjustment passages 444 to 446, and discharges it from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 into which the game ball B1 was taken.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the rotating body 440 is a rotating base body that prevents the game balls B1 in the adjustment passages 444 to 446 from moving backward from the front surface of the game board 420, behind the passage forming part 443. 441. The rotating base body 441 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member having a predetermined thickness, and is integrally formed with the passage forming portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 52, the game board 420 is formed with a recess 421 that rotatably accommodates a rotating base 441, and the rotating base 441 is accommodated in the recess 421. It is rotatably fixed in a fixed position. The passage forming portion 443 exists from the front surface of the rotary base body 441 to near the back surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 52, an adjustment drive section 184 including an output shaft 184a is arranged behind the rotating base body 441. The rotating body 440 is connected to the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 such that the axis of the rotating base body 441 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a.

The axis of the rotating base body 441 in the rotating body 440 is perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420, and the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60° in 1 sec when the adjustment drive unit 184 is in the driving state. Rotate. The adjustment drive unit 184 in this embodiment uses the same stepping motor as the adjustment drive unit 184 in the first embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 has a configuration in which the output shaft 184a rotates once when the excitation signal is transmitted for 500 pulses from the main controller 60, and the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step. is 0.72°.

As shown in FIG. 51, three entrances and exits 444a to 446a are formed in the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 as openings that are open toward the outside. The three entrances and exits 444a to 446a are formed such that the centers of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a are located at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the passage forming portion 443. The three entrances and exits 444a to 446a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 in the order of first entrance and exit 444a, second entrance and exit 445a, and third entrance and exit 446a.

The first entrance/exit 444a and the second entrance/exit 445a have a width of 14 mm, which is larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball B1. On the other hand, the third entrance/exit 446a has a width of 11.5 mm, which is smaller than the first entrance/exit 444a and the second entrance/exit 445a, and larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The first adjustment passage 444 is formed from the first entrance/exit 444a toward the central region of the rotary body 440, and the second adjustment passage 445 is formed from the second entrance/exit 445a toward the central region of the rotary body 440. . Further, the third adjustment passage 446 is formed from the third entrance/exit 446a toward the central region of the rotating body 440.

The first adjustment passage 444 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually widens near the first entrance/exit 444a toward the first entrance/exit 444a. Similarly, the second adjustment passage 445 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually widens near the second entrance/exit 445a toward the second entrance/exit 445a. On the other hand, the third adjustment passage 446 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually becomes narrower near the third entrance/exit 446a toward the third entrance/exit 446a.

If the configuration is such that the shapes near the three entrances and exits 444a to 446a are all the same, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 will be monotonous. On the other hand, by making the shape of the vicinity of the third entrance/exit 446a different from the shape of the vicinity of the first entrance/exit 444a and the second entrance/exit 445a, the player's response to the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 can be improved. It can increase attention.

As shown in FIG. 51, the first adjustment passage 444, the second adjustment passage 445, and the third adjustment passage 446 formed in the passage forming part 443 are straight passages that are open toward the front. As shown in FIG. 52, the rear sides of the three adjustment passages 444 to 446 are defined by the front surface of the rotating base body 441, and the front sides are defined by the back surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 51, an intersection space 443a that is one size larger than the game ball B1 is provided at the center of the passage forming portion 443. The first adjustment passage 444 is a passage that connects the first entrance/exit 444a and the intersection space 443a, and the second adjustment passage 445 is a passage that connects the second entrance/exit 445a and the intersection space 443a. Further, the third adjustment passage 446 is a passage that connects the third entrance/exit 446a and the intersection space 443a.

The game ball B1 can move from each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 to the intersecting space 443a, and can also move from the intersecting space 443a to each of the adjusting passages 444 to 446. Further, each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 has a passage length that can accommodate two game balls B1.

As shown in FIG. 51, the width of each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 is constant except near the entrances and exits 444a to 446a. Here, a reference line passing through the center of the first adjustment passage 444 is defined as a first center line 444b, and a reference line passing through the center of the second adjustment passage 445 is defined as a second center line 445b. Further, a reference line passing through the center of the third adjustment passage 446 is defined as a third center line 446b.

The first adjustment passage 444 extends in a direction in which the first center line 444b intersects with the inner wall of the second adjustment passage 445, and the second adjustment passage 445 extends in a direction in which the second center line 445b intersects with the inner wall of the third adjustment passage 446. It extends in the direction that intersects with. The third adjustment passage 446 extends in a direction in which the third center line 446b intersects the inner wall of the first adjustment passage 444.

In other words, the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the first adjustment passage 444, and the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the second adjustment passage 445. The passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446 exists. Further, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the third adjustment passage 446. Here, as shown in FIG. 51, each of the center lines 444b to 446b passes near the center of the passage forming portion 443.

Next, the guide member 450 provided on the game board 420 close to the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 is provided at the lower right of the rotating body 440.

As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 includes a plate-shaped guide base body 451 having a predetermined thickness. Further, the game board 420 is formed with a guide recess (not shown) in which the guide base body 451 can be accommodated without any gaps. The guide member 450 is fixed by nailing the guide base body 451 to the game board 420 with the guide base body 451 accommodated in the guide recess. When the guide member 450 is fixed to the game board 420, the front surface of the guide base body 451 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 420.

Further, the guide member 450 includes an upright wall 452 that vertically projects forward from the front surface of the guide base body 451. The upstanding wall 452 is integrally formed with the guide base body 451 and extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 51, the upright wall 452 is formed along the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 from the right side to the lower right side of the rotation center 440a of the rotating body 440.

Therefore, the upright wall 452 changes from a rotational state in which any of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 are opened toward the right to a rotational state in which the entrances and exits 444a to 446a are opened diagonally downward to the right. Until then, the entrances and exits 444a to 446a are closed. This prevents the game balls B1 present in the doorways 444a to 446a from falling downward.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 around the adjustment mechanism 430 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, a guide nail 472 is provided near the top of the rotating body 440 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from above to one of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440. There are several.

A left guide nail row 473 that guides the game ball B1, which is above the rotating body 440 and flowing down to the left of the center of the rotating body 440, toward the upper center of the rotating body 440 by a plurality of guide nails 472; A right guide nail row 474 is formed above the body 440 and guides the game ball B1 flowing down to the right of the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440.

The interval between the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the left guide nail row 473 and the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the right guide nail row 474 is one size larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when any of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a in the rotating body 440 are opened upward, the game ball B1 guided by the guide nail 472 enters through the entrances and exits 444a to 446a.

As shown in FIG. 51, the distance from the lowermost guide nail 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and right guide nail row 474 to the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. In a rotating state in which none of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a in the rotating body 440 are opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper part of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 enters the entrances and exits 444a to 446a. I can't.

In this case, a gap is provided between the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 and the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 through which the game ball B1 can pass. , the game balls B1 that have not been taken into the rotating body 440 can escape to the left and right gaming areas PA of the rotating body 440 through the entrances and exits 444a to 446a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been able to enter the upper part of the rotating body 440 will not stay there.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, there is an entrance/exit in the upper left side of the rotating body 440, which is open to the upper left of the rotating body 440 for the game ball B1 that has flown down from diagonally above the left side of the rotating body 440. A left guard nail 475 is provided to prevent balls from entering from 444a to 446a, and a game ball B1 that has flown down from diagonally above the right side of the rotating body 440 is placed on the upper right side of the rotating body 440. A right guard nail 476 is provided to prevent balls from entering through the entrances and exits 444a to 446a that are open toward the outside.

Due to the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476, the entrances and exits 444a to 446a through which the game balls B1 can be taken in are limited to those that are open upward. This prevents a plurality of game balls B1 from being taken into the rotating body 440 from the plurality of entrances and exits 444a to 446a at once.

As shown in FIG. 51, a space wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476 and the rotating body 440. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is not taken in by being guided to the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 by the left guide nail row 473 or the right guide nail row 474 is in the space between the rotating body 440 and the left guard nail 475, or the rotating body 440 and the right guard nail 476 can flow downstream.

As shown in FIG. 51, at the upper right of the first through gate 35 and at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 430, game balls B1 other than the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 are placed between the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate. A guard nail 471 is provided to prevent the player from entering from between the gate 35 and winning the first through gate 35.

By limiting the game ball B1 that can win to the first through gate 35 to the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 430, the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning timing during the continuous winning period. You can prevent winning. As a result, it is possible to create a configuration in which the general electricity release winnings occur continuously in the general electricity release lottery that is executed during the continuous winning period.

On the other hand, at the upper left of the first through gate 35 and at the lower left of the adjustment mechanism 430, a game ball B1 that is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 430 toward the lower left and misses without entering the first through gate 35 is placed through the first through gate 35. Guard nails 471 are provided at intervals to allow escape to the left of the gate 35.

The guard nail 471 prevents game balls B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 from flowing down from the upper left of the first through gate 35 and entering the first through gate 35. Moreover, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 and leftward from the first through gate 35 will not collide with the guard nail 471 and bounce back toward the first through gate 35 again.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that enters from any of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be explained. First, the movement of the game ball B1 that entered through the first entrance/exit 444a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 53(a) to 53(d). FIGS. 53(a) to 53(d) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

FIG. 53(a) shows a rotating state in which the first entrance/exit 444a is opened upward. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) in a rotating state in which the first entrance/exit 444a is opened upward. This allows the ball to enter the first entrance/exit 444a. The game ball B1 that enters from the first entrance/exit 444a moves within the first adjustment path 444.

In the state where the first entrance/exit 444a is opened upward, the first adjustment passage 444 is inclined downward, and directs the game ball B1 from the first entrance/exit 444a above toward the intersection space 443a below. invite. As already explained in FIG. 51, the first center line 444b of the first adjustment passage 444 intersects with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445. Therefore, the moving direction of the game ball B1 moving within the first adjustment passage 444 is the direction in which it comes into contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445.

FIG. 53(b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after being guided to the intersecting space 443a. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the game ball B1 that enters from the first entrance/exit 444a passes through the first adjustment passage 444, which has a passage length approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and reaches the intersection space 443a. During this time, the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise.

Even if the rotating body 440 rotates, the positional relationship that the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists on the extension line of the first adjustment passage 444 does not change. Further, as already explained, the second entrance/exit 445a is located at a position where the first entrance/exit 444a is rotated by 120° around the center of the rotating body 440. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(b), at the timing when the game ball B1 exists in the intersecting space 443a, the second adjustment passage 445 has an inclination diagonally downward to the right from the intersecting space 443a.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), after entering the intersection space 443a from the first adjustment passage 444, the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 is guided to the second adjustment passage 445 and Head toward the entrance/exit 445a.

FIG. 53(c) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the second entrance/exit 445a. As shown in FIG. 53(c), at the timing when the game ball B1 is guided to the second entrance/exit 445a by the second adjustment passage 445, at least a portion of the second entrance/exit 445a is blocked by the upright wall 452. At this timing, there is no gap in the second entrance/exit 445a through which the game ball B1 can pass.

Therefore, the game ball B1 moves in the rotational direction as the rotating body 440 rotates and waits until a gap is created in the second entrance/exit 445a through which it can pass. As already explained, the rotational speed of the rotating body 440 is constant. Furthermore, the position of the standing wall 452 does not change. For this reason, in a state where the game ball B1 is waiting at the second entrance/exit 445a, a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is periodically generated at the second entrance/exit 445a.

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), while the first entrance/exit 444a is open upward, the second entrance/exit 445a is already blocked by the upright wall 452. The upright wall 452 blocks at least a portion of each of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a in a state where the entrances and exits 444a to 446a are open to the right, and prevents the game ball B1 from being ejected to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 440 is not discharged from above the upright wall 452.

FIG. 53(d) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is created in the second entrance/exit 445a. As shown in FIG. 53(d), when a gap is created in the second entrance/exit 445a through which the game ball B1 can pass, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward due to its own weight.

The discharge timing at which a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is created in the second entrance/exit 445a and the discharge position at the discharge timing are constant. The adjustment mechanism 430 is set so that the discharge position is directly above the first through gate 35. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position at the discharge timing from the second entrance/exit 445a falls downward and enters the first through gate 35.

However, at the discharge timing, the distance from the second entrance/exit 445a to the first through gate 35 is set longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance/exit 445a will win the first through gate 35 with a high probability, but the winning probability is not 100%.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that entered from the third entrance/exit 446a will be explained. In a state where the third entrance/exit 446a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotary body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) passes from the third entrance/exit 446a to the third adjustment passage 446. Enter the ball.

The inclination of the third adjustment passage 446 in the state where the third entrance/exit 446a is opened upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53(a). Therefore, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists ahead of the movement direction of the game ball B1 moving within the third adjustment passage 446.

The positional relationship between the third adjustment passage 446 and the first adjustment passage 444 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. 53(b). Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the third adjustment passage 446 and entered the intersecting space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444, and is guided toward the first entrance/exit 444a.

As already explained, the shape of the first entrance/exit 444a is the same as the shape of the second entrance/exit 445a. Therefore, the discharge timing and discharge position of the game ball B1 discharged from the first entrance/exit 444a are the same as the discharge timing and discharge position of the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance/exit 445a, which have already been explained with reference to FIG. 53(d). Same as position. The game ball B1 discharged from the first entrance/exit 444a enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that entered from the second entrance/exit 445a will be explained. In a state where the second entrance/exit 445a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotary body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) passes from the second entrance/exit 445a to the second adjustment passage 445. Enter the ball.

The inclination of the second adjustment passage 445 in the state where the second entrance/exit 445a is opened upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53(a). Further, the positional relationship between the second adjustment passage 445 and the third adjustment passage 446 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445, which has already been described with reference to FIG. 53(b). . Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the second adjustment passage 445 and entered the intersecting space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446, and is guided toward the third entrance/exit 446a.

Here, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance/exit 446a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and (b). FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

FIG. 54(a) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the third entrance/exit 446a. As shown in FIG. 54(a), the game ball B1 is guided to the third entrance/exit 446a by the third adjustment passage 446. At the timing when the game ball B1 reaches the third entrance/exit 446a, at least a portion of the third entrance/exit 446a is blocked by the upright wall 452. There is no gap in the third entrance/exit 446a through which the game ball B1 can pass. Therefore, the game ball B1 will wait at the third entrance/exit 446a until a gap through which it can pass is created.

FIG. 54(b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance/exit 446a. As already explained, the third entrance/exit 446a is formed narrower than the first entrance/exit 444a and the second entrance/exit 445a. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the third entrance/exit 446a, the game ball B1 is easily influenced by the passage wall that exists on the rear side in the rotational direction in the third adjustment passage 446.

As already explained, there is a gap greater than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 54(b), at the timing of ejecting the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is pushed toward the left from the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446, so that the course of the game ball B1 after being ejected is changed. It may shift to the left and come off the first through gate 35. Therefore, the winning probability of the game ball B1 that enters through the second entrance 445a and is ejected from the third entrance 446a is as follows: The ball enters through the first entrance 444a and is ejected from the second entrance 445a. The probability of winning the game ball B1 into the first through gate 35 is lower than the winning probability of the game ball B1 entered from the third entrance 446a and discharged from the first entrance 444a. .

Here, if the game balls B1 are flowing down in a row, the first game ball B1 and the second game ball B1 are both placed in the same doorway 444a to 446a facing upward. There is a possibility that the ball will enter the field. In this case, the two game balls B1 are guided to the same entrances and exits 444a to 446a and are discharged from the same entrances and exits 444a to 446a. The timing and direction in which the first game ball B1 is ejected are as already explained in FIG. 53(d) and FIG. The game ball B1 that is entered enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability, and the game ball B1 that is discharged from the third entrance 446a leaves the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

On the other hand, the second game ball B1 is located inside the rotating body 440 than the first game ball B1 at the timing when the first game ball B1 is discharged. For this reason, the ejection timing of the second game ball B1 is delayed than the ejection timing of the first game ball B1. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 440 has progressed beyond the ejection timing of the first game ball B1, and the second game ball B1 is ejected in a state where the ejection direction has moved to the left. . Therefore, regardless of which of the exit/exit ports 444a to 446a is the discharge source, the second game ball B1 will come off to the left of the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

In this way, even if the two game balls B1 flow down the gaming area PA in a continuous state, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 will enter the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning period in the continuous winning period. It is set to be low. For this reason, even when using the adjustment mechanism 430 in this embodiment, when the continuous winning period comes, the general power open winnings occur continuously.

The adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotary body 440 so that the timing at which the game ball B1 can be ejected from the rotary body 440 occurs once every 2 seconds. By configuring the adjustment drive unit 184 to slowly rotate the rotating body 440, the game ball B1 that collides with the entrances and exits 444a to 446a that are moving in the rotational direction at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 is strongly moved to the right. It is possible to avoid a situation where the ball is bounced back and gives the player a sense of discomfort.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The game ball B1 is taken into any of the adjustment passages 444 to 446, and is discharged from entrances and exits 444a to 446a that are different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 that took the game ball B1. In a configuration in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held in the doorways 444a to 446a that take in the game ball B1, in order to prevent the game ball B1 from falling from the doorways 444a to 446a during rotation. Fall prevention means provided around the rotating body 440 is required. In this case, the game ball B1 may be caught between the rotating body 440 and the fall prevention means, and the rotation of the rotating body 440 may be inhibited.

On the other hand, by configuring the game ball B1 to pass through the inside of the passage forming part 443 and be ejected from the entrances and exits 444a to 446a that are different from the entrances and exits 444a to 446a through which it was taken in, problems may occur during the game, and the game It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will be necessary to interrupt the process and take measures to resolve the problem. Furthermore, by suppressing an increase in the number of members configuring the adjustment mechanism 430, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 430 can be reduced.

The rotating body 440 is configured to eject the game ball B1 before the entrances and exits 444a to 446a, which take in the game ball B1 in an upward direction, become oriented such that the game ball B1 can be ejected. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the rotary body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held in the entrance/exit 444a to 446a through which the game ball B1 is taken in, the time required from taking in the game ball B1 to ejecting the game ball B1 can be shortened. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's interest shifts to another place and the player's attention to the adjustment mechanism 430 decreases between when the game ball B1 is taken in and until it is ejected.

The adjustment mechanism 430 includes an upright wall 452 that prevents the game ball B1 from falling downward until the game ball B1 guided to the entrances and exits 444a to 446a reaches the discharge timing at which the first through gate 35 can win a prize. . By using the upright wall 452, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls B1 that are discharged downward and come off the first through gate 35 at a timing earlier than the discharge timing. Therefore, during the continuous winning period, the possibility that the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 out of the winning period is reduced, and the probability of winning is increased when a winning occurs during the continuous winning period. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the continuous winning period and improve the interest of the game.

Since the distance between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 is greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430. , the ejected game ball B1 is configured to come off the first through gate 35. The width of the third entrance/exit 446a is set narrower than the width of the first entrance/exit 444a and the width of the second entrance/exit 445a. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance/exit 446a will come off the first through gate 35 is the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance 445a will come off the first through gate 35, and the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance 445a will come off the first through gate 35. There is a higher possibility that the game ball B1 taken in through the third entrance/exit 446a will be discharged from the first through gate 35. As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 430 enter the first through gate 35, thereby avoiding a situation where the player focuses only on the intake of the game balls B1 into the adjustment mechanism 430 and does not pay attention to the ejection. be able to. By attracting the attention of the players until the moment they win the first through gate 35, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game ball B1 taken into the first adjustment passage 444 from the first entrance/exit 444a is guided to the second adjustment passage 445 and discharged from the second entrance/exit 445a. The game ball B1 taken in is guided to the third adjustment passage 446 and discharged from the third entrance/exit 446a. Moreover, the game ball B1 taken into the third adjustment passage 446 from the third entrance/exit 446a is guided to the first adjustment passage 444 and is discharged from the first entrance/exit 444a. In this way, since the game balls B1 taken in from the entrances and exits 444a to 446a are configured to move through the combination of adjustment passages 444 to 446 that can discharge the game balls B1 in the shortest distance, as the rotating body 440 rotates, It is possible to avoid a situation in which the captured game ball B1 is not easily ejected and repeatedly rises and falls within the adjustment passages 444 to 446. This prevents the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 toward the first through gate 35 from decreasing, and prevents the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 430 from waning.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The game board 520 of this embodiment is provided with an adjustment device 540 for adjusting the timing at which game balls B1 are supplied to the first through gate 35. The adjustment device 540 and the configuration around the adjustment device 540 will be described based on FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 520 showing the first through gate 35 and the adjustment device 540 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 55, on the game board 520, above the first through gate 35, there is an adjustment device 540 and a portion of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 and headed for the first through gate 35. An adjustment mechanism 530 is provided, which includes an electric nail 560 that prevents winnings in the through gate 35. Here, the electric nail 560 is the same member as the electric nail 361 already explained in FIG. 47 of the third embodiment.

First, the adjustment device 540 will be explained with reference to FIG. 55. As shown in FIG. 55, the adjusting device 540 allows the game ball B1 to enter the adjusting device 540 by being in the open state, and allows the game ball B1 to enter the adjusting device 540 by being in the closed state. an adjustment unit 546 that prohibits the adjustment, an adjustment drive unit 547 that executes the transition from the closed state to the open state in the adjustment unit 546, and the transition from the open state to the closed state, and the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment device 540. a guide member 541 for guiding the terminal toward the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment device 540 includes a plate-shaped base body 542 having a predetermined thickness. Furthermore, the game board 520 is provided with a base recess (not shown) that can accommodate the base body 542 without any gaps. The adjustment device 540 is fixed by nailing the base body 542 to the game board 520 in a state where the base body 542 is accommodated in the base recess. When the guide member 541 is fixed to the game board 520, the front surface of the base body 542 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 520.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide member 541 includes a passage forming portion 543 that is formed to vertically protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 542. As shown in FIG. The passage forming portion 543 exists from the center to the bottom of the front surface of the base body 542 in the vertical direction, and also extends from the front surface of the base body 542 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). There is. A guide passage 545 for guiding the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 is formed in the passage forming portion 543.

The guide passage 545 is formed by providing a through hole that vertically passes through the passage forming part 543, and allows one game ball B1 to pass therethrough. , has a passage cross section that makes it impossible for a plurality of game balls B1 to pass through at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide path 545 is a straight path toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The guide passage 545 has a passage length approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and can direct the game ball B1 to be discharged. The distance from the lower end of the guide passage 525 to the upper end of the first through gate 35 is set to approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 545 is placed at the position of the electric nail 560. Depending on the situation, there are cases in which a prize is won in the first through gate 35 and cases in which a prize is not won.

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment section 546 is provided on the upper part of the base body 542 and in front of the front surface of the base body 542. As shown in FIG. Further, the adjustment drive section 547 is arranged behind the adjustment section 546 and behind the base body 542. The adjustment section 546 is connected to an adjustment drive section 547 mounted on the back side of the game board 520, and is driven by the adjustment drive section 547 to take either a closed state or an open state. When the adjustment section 546 is in the closed state, the game ball B1 cannot enter the guide path 545, and when the adjustment section 546 is in the open state, the game ball B1 can enter the guide path 545.

The adjustment drive unit 547 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the drive signal output from the MPU 62 is input to the adjustment drive unit 547. The adjustment drive section 547 keeps the adjustment section 546 in the closed state when the drive signal is in the LOW state, and opens the adjustment section 546 when the drive signal is in the HI state.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) that is executed every 4 msec, the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) controls the adjustment drive section 547 on the condition that it is the switching timing to shift the adjustment section 546 from the closed state to the open state. The drive signal being output is raised from the LOW state to the HI state, and the drive signal being output to the adjustment drive section 547 is set to HI on the condition that it is the timing to shift the adjustment section 546 from the open state to the closed state. from the state to the LOW state.

Based on the drive signal input from the main side CPU 63, the adjustment drive unit 547 repeats the opening and closing operation of the adjustment unit 546, which closes the adjustment unit 546 for 0.95 seconds and opens it for 0.05 seconds. Therefore, the guide passage 545 is in a state where it can take in the game ball B1 at a cycle of 1 sec, and can discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of about 1 sec.

Here, the closed state and open state of the adjustment section 546 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b). FIG. 56(a) is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the closed state, and FIG. 56(b) is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the adjustment section 546 is located at the upper left of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and is attached to a left rotation shaft 548 extending in the front-rear direction. A substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped left adjustment member 549 is rotatably fixed. The left adjustment member 549 extends from the front of the game board 520 (FIG. 55) to near the back of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the left side adjustment member 549 includes a right side surface 549a located inside the adjustment part 546 in the closed state and a left side surface 549b located outside. In the adjustment section 546 in the closed state, the right side surface 549a and the left side surface 549b are downwardly inclined to the left.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), the left adjustment member 549 rotates counterclockwise around the left rotation shaft 548 when the adjustment portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. When the adjustment portion 546 is in the open state, the left side adjustment member 549 has its right side surface 549a tilted downward to the right, and its left side surface 549b tilted downward and rightward. The state is as follows.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the adjustment section 546 is located at the upper right of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and has a right rotation shaft 551 extending in the front-rear direction, and a right rotation shaft 551 extending in the front-rear direction. A substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped right adjustment member 552 is rotatably fixed to the adjustment member 551 . The right adjustment member 552 exists from the front of the game board 520 to near the back of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the right side adjustment member 552 includes a left side surface 552a located inside the adjustment part 546 in the closed state and a right side surface 552b located outside. In the adjustment section 546 in the closed state, the left side surface 552a and the right side surface 552b are inclined downward to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), the right adjustment member 552 rotates clockwise around the right rotation shaft 551 when the adjustment portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. When the adjustment portion 546 is in the open state, the left side surface 552a of the right side adjustment member 552 is tilted downward to the left, and the right side surface 552b is tilted downward to the left. The state is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the adjustment section 546 in the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 is such that the game ball B1 cannot fit into the gap. Moderately narrow. As already explained, in the closed state of the adjustment part 546, the left side surface 549b of the left side adjustment member 549 is inclined downwardly toward the left, and the game ball B1 in contact with the left side surface 549b is tilted downwardly to the left. Let go. In addition, the right side surface 552b of the right side adjustment member 552 is inclined downwardly toward the right, and causes the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the right side surface 552b to escape to the lower right side.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the adjustment section 546 in the open state, there is a gap between the right side surface 549a of the left side adjustment member 549 and the left side surface 552a of the right side adjustment member 552, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. There is a wide space. As already explained, when the adjustment part 546 is in the open state, the right side surface 549a of the left side adjustment member 549 is inclined downward to the right, and the game ball B1 in contact with the right side surface 549a is tilted downward to the right. The ball bounces back and enters the guide path 545. Further, the left side surface 552a of the right side adjustment member 552 is inclined downwardly toward the left, and the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the left side surface 552a is bounced downward to the left and enters the guide path 545.

Further, in the process of the adjustment portion 546 transitioning from the open state to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 gradually narrows. The adjustment section 546 allows the right side surface 549a of the left side adjustment member 549 to move downward to the left at a timing before the interval between the upper end of the left side adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right side adjustment member 552 becomes narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. The left side surface 552a of the right adjusting member 552 is tilted downward and to the right.

As shown in FIG. 55, the electric nail 560 is connected to a nail drive unit 560a, contacts the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525, changes the course of the game ball B1, and causes the game ball B1 to A prohibited position that prevents the first through gate 35 from entering a prize, and a permitted position that allows the game ball B1 to deviate from the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the guide path 525 and enter the first through gate 35. and take it.

A nail drive signal output from the output port of the MPU 62 is input to the nail drive section 560a. The nail drive unit 560a maintains the electric nail 560 in the prohibited position when the nail drive signal is in the LOW state, and moves the electric nail 560 to the permitted position when the nail drive signal is in the HI state. Switching between the prohibited position and the permitted position of the electric nail 560 in the nail drive unit 560a is performed in conjunction with switching between the closed state and the open state of the adjustment unit 546 in the adjustment drive unit 547.

Specifically, in the main CPU 63, the nail drive signal is raised from the LOW state to the HI state in synchronization with the rise of the drive signal from the LOW state to the HI state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 moves from the prohibited position to the permitted position in synchronization with the timing at which the adjustment section 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. The electric nail 560 always assumes the permitted position during the period when the adjustment section 546 is in the open state. Therefore, during the period when the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 is in a state where it can win a prize at the first through gate 35.

In the main CPU 63, the nail drive signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state at a timing later than the timing at which the drive signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 returns from the permitted position to the prohibited position a little later than the timing at which the adjustment section 546 returns from the open state to the closed state. The timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is such that when the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state that continues for 0.05 seconds, the game ball B1 that enters the guide path 525 within 0.04 seconds from the start timing of the open state is permitted. This is the timing when it is possible to pass to the left of the electric nail 560 located at the position and enter the first through gate 35 to win.

Further, the timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is such that the electric nail 560 is once pinched by the adjusting part 546 before the adjusting part 546 in the open state returns to the closed state, and then the electric nail 560 is taken into the guide passage 525. This is the timing to prevent the game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35.

Here, a situation in which the electric nail 560 prevents the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 from entering the first through gate 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57(a) to (d). 57(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 520 showing the vicinity of the adjustment mechanism 530 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), when the game ball B1 enters the adjustment section 546 in the intermediate state transitioning from the open state to the closed state, the game ball B1 enters the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 and the right side adjustment member 552 and the left side surface 552a. In this state, the right side surface 549a of the left side adjustment member 549 is tilted downward to the left, and the left side surface 552a of the right side adjustment member 552 is tilted downward to the right; If the condition that the contact position with the adjustment part 546 is above the center of gravity of the game ball B1 is satisfied, the pinched game ball B1 will be pushed downward by the force of the adjustment part 546 to return to the closed state. It is pushed and enters the guide passage 525.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment part 546 passes the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment portions 546 collides with the electric nail 560 which has returned to the prohibited position downstream of the guide path 525, and comes off to the left of the first through gate 35.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the firing interval of the game balls B1 in the game ball firing mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 seconds at the shortest. A plurality of game balls B1 may flow down toward the adjustment section 546 of the adjustment device 540 in a continuous state. As already explained, the duration of the open state of the adjustment section 546 is set to 0.05 sec. Therefore, when two game balls B1 consecutively try to enter the adjustment section 546 within 0.05 seconds, the first game ball B1 enters the adjustment section 546 as shown in FIG. 57(c). After the ball enters the guide passage 525 in the open state, there is a possibility that the second game ball B1 will be caught in the adjustment part 546 that is trying to return from the open state to the closed state.

In this case, when the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment part 546 enters the guide path 525, the electric nail 560 will cause the first game ball B1 to reach the position of the electric nail 560. It is in the permitted position at the timing. Therefore, the first game ball B1 can pass to the left of the electric nail 560 and enter the first through gate 35.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment part 546 reaches the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, the second game ball B1 collides with the electric nail 560. In this way, the electric nail 560 prevents the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment section 546 from entering the first through gate 35. This prevents the second game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35 at a timing that deviates from the winning period during the continuous winning period, resulting in a loss in the general electricity open lottery. I can do it.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The adjustment mechanism 530 is configured to not allow the game ball B1 to enter the guide path 525 when the adjustment section 546 is in the closed state. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 at a timing that does not result in the general electricity open winning during the continuous winning period. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the general electricity release during the consecutive winning period. In this way, by increasing the player's expectations for the continuous winning period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The distance between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 is more than the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 flows down toward the first through gate 35. An electric nail 560 is provided that moves between a prohibited position that blocks the route and a permitted position that allows passage through the route, and the electric nail 560 moves at the end of the period in which the adjustment section 546 remains open. This configuration prevents the game ball B1 that enters the guide path 525 from entering the first through gate 35.

If all of the game balls B1 taken into the guide path 525 enter the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player focuses only on the taking of the game balls B1 into the adjustment mechanism 530 and does not pay attention to the ejection. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which some of the game balls B1 taken into the guide path 525 are prevented from winning into the first through gate 35, the player's adjustment is made until the moment when the first through gate 35 wins. It is possible to maintain interest in the surroundings of the mechanism 530 and improve the interest of the game.

In the adjustment mechanism 530, when the adjustment part 546 is in the open state, after the first game ball B1 is taken into the guide passage 525, the second game ball B1 that has been connected to the first game ball B1 is adjusted. When the second game ball B1 is caught between the adjustment parts 546 in the intermediate state, the electric nail 560 in the prohibition position prevents the second game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 at a timing that does not result in the general electricity open winning during the continuous winning period. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the general electricity release during the consecutive winning period. In this way, by increasing the player's expectations for the continuous winning period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Another form of the fifth embodiment>
- In the fifth embodiment described above, the adjustment drive section 547 may not be provided, and the adjustment section 546 may remain in the open state and not move. In this case, since the adjustment section 546 does not take the closed state, the game ball B1 can always enter the guide path 525. The game ball B1 discharged from the guide path 525 collides with the electric nail 560 when the electric nail 560 is in the prohibited position, and therefore deviates from the path toward the first through gate 35. On the other hand, when the electric nail 560 is in the permitted position, it is possible to pass to the left of the electric nail 560 and enter the first through gate 35 to win. For example, by configuring the electric nail 560 to repeat the prohibited position for 0.95 sec and the permitted position for 0.05 sec by the nail drive unit 560a, the adjustment mechanism 530 can be adjusted to the first through gate 35. It is possible to provide game balls B1 at a 1-sec period.

- In the fifth embodiment described above, an escape passage may be formed at the rear of the game board 520 to allow the game ball B1 caught between the adjusting portions 546 to escape to the rear of the game board 520. Specifically, in a region of the game board 520 located behind the adjustment section 546, a passage entrance is formed as an opening facing forward. The game board 520 includes an escape passage that guides the game ball B1 taken in from the passage entrance downward, and a passage exit that discharges the game ball B1 guided to the escape passage to the front of the game board 520.

In the state where the adjustment part 546 sandwiches the game ball B1, the right side surface of the left side adjustment member 549 is tilted to the left toward the rear, and the left side surface of the right side adjustment member 552 is tilted to the right toward the rear. It will be tilted towards the side. Therefore, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment section 546 is guided to the passage entrance formed at the rear of the adjustment section 546 as the adjustment section 546 shifts to the closed state. A game ball B1 entering the escape passage from the passage entrance is guided downward by the escape passage. The game ball B1 is ejected from the passageway exit and is again positioned in front of the game board 520.

- In the fifth embodiment described above, by adjusting the relationship between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, it is possible to determine whether the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 enters the first through gate 35 or the case where the prize is won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is a case where it is not performed. Specifically, the guide passage 525 is provided diagonally above and to the left of the first through gate 35, and an interval larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35. ing. In this case, even if the electric nail 560 does not exist between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the ejected game ball B1 is It is possible to cause the ball B1 to enter the first through gate 35 in some cases and not in others. By leaving open the possibility that the game ball B1 ejected from the guide path 525 will come off the first through gate 35, the player's interest can also be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 after being ejected.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a second operating port 582 is provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA, and a prize distribution device 583 is provided below the second operating port 582. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 580 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board 580. As shown in FIG. 58, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located on the right side of the variable display unit 36. , and a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36.

As described in the first embodiment, the first through gate 35 is provided in the left side area PA2, and the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35. The winning timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 can enter the first through gate 35 occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. In addition, in the general electricity lottery held when a prize is won in the first through gate 35, a winning target period in which the general electricity lottery is won occurs every 1 sec. Therefore, if the winning timing overlaps with the winning period, it will be a consecutive winning period, and if the winning timing does not overlap with the winning period, it will become a non-winning consecutive period.

As shown in FIG. 58, like the game board 24 in the first embodiment, the game board 580 includes a passage entrance 171, an escape passage 172, a passage exit 173, and an exit roof 174 around the adjustment mechanism 180. ing. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flown down toward the adjustment mechanism 180 but has not been taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171. Then, the game ball B1 is guided to the passage exit 173 by the escape passage 172, and is discharged from the passage exit 173 toward the front of the game board 580.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first operating port 581 is provided in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 581 does not include a member for opening and closing the first operating port 581, and is open upward. As shown in FIG. 58, the variable display unit 36 includes a stage 36a through which the game ball B1 can pass and through which the game ball B1 can be ejected. A guide path is formed in the variable display unit 36 to allow the game balls B1 to flow into the stage 36a. The game ball B1 that flows onto the stage 36a and is discharged from the center of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 falls toward the first operating port 581 from directly above the first operating port 581. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the center of the stage 36a can easily enter the first operating port 581.

Since the first operating port 581 is provided in the lower area PA4, when the firing operation device 28 (Fig. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and the right side area PA3 In any case where the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down, it is possible to win the game ball B1 into the first operating port 581. However, since the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 36a is provided for the left side area PA2 and not for the right side area PA3, the flow down the left side area PA2 may flow down the right side area PA3. It is more likely that a prize will be won to the first operating port 581 than in the first operating port 581. Furthermore, the arrangement of the game parts and nails 24b in the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 is such that winnings to the first operating port 581 are more likely to occur when flowing down the left area PA2 than when flowing down the right area PA3. is set to . The game ball B1 flowing down the right side area PA3 hardly ever enters the first operating port 581.

As shown in FIG. 58, a second operating port 582 is provided in the right area PA3. The second operating port 582 is configured to prevent winning when the firing operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

The configuration of the second operating port 582 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59(a) and 59(b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operating port 582. The second actuating port 582 is provided with a general electric accessory 582a as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The general electric power accessory 582a is connected to a general electric power drive unit 582b mounted on the back side of the game board 580, and is driven by the general electric power drive unit 582b to the closed state shown in FIG. 59(a). and the open state shown in FIG. 59(b). When the general electric accessory 582a is in the closed state, the game ball B1 cannot enter the second operating port 582, and when the general electric accessory 582a is in the open state, the game ball B1 can enter the second operating port 582. Incidentally, when it is in the open state, the general electric accessory 582a protrudes to the gaming area PA side and guides the winning to the second operating port 582. The second operating port 582 is provided with a detection sensor 582c for detecting the winning game ball B1 in the second operating port 582. The detection sensor 582c is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects the winning to the second operating port 582 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 582c. .

As shown in FIG. 58, a second through gate 39 is provided above the second operating port 582 in the right side area PA3. The second through gate 39 prevents winning when the firing operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and the second through gate 39 allows the game ball B1 to flow down the right side area PA3. It is provided in a position where it is possible to win a prize when the firing operation device 28 is operated. The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the second through gate 39 in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that wins the prize in the second through gate 39 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. This allows the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39 to enter the second operating port 582. The second through gate 39 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39. The detection sensor is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects winning in the second through gate 39 based on detection information from the detection sensor.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the general power open lottery is executed when the game ball B1 wins in either the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39. If the general electricity release lottery is won, the general electricity accessory 582a of the second operation port 582 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure display section 584 and a second special figure display section 585 are provided at the lower right of the game board 580. In the first special figure display section 584, when a winning lottery is performed in response to winning at the first operating port 581, a changing display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed, and a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. be exposed. In addition, in the second special figure display section 585, when a winning lottery is held triggered by a winning in the second operating port 582, a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed, and a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. will be held.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special symbol reservation display section 586 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special symbol display section 584, and a second special symbol display section 586 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special symbol display section 585. A special figure reservation display section 587 is provided. The first special figure holding display section 586 displays the number of game balls B1 that have entered the first operating port 581, up to a maximum of four, and the second special figure holding display section 587 displays the number of game balls B1 that have entered the first operating port 582. The number of winning game balls B1 is displayed pending up to a maximum of four.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the lower area PA4, the special electric winning device 32 already explained in the first embodiment is provided at a position below the first operating port 581 and above the out port 24a. It is being The special electric prize winning device 32 is operated when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. It is possible to win in either case.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the right area PA3, a prize distribution device 583 is provided below the second operating port 582. The sorting winning device 583 disables winning when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and the firing operation device 583 so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

A winning lottery is executed when a prize is won in either the first operating port 581 or the second operating port 582. If the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode already described in the first embodiment. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 becomes open, and it becomes possible to win the game ball B1 to the special electric winning device 32. In addition to the jackpot results, the winning lottery that is executed when a prize is entered into the second operation port 582 is also provided with a small win result. When a small winning result is obtained in the winning lottery executed in response to a prize winning to the second operating port 582, a transition is made to a branch execution mode in which winning to the distribution prize winning device 583 becomes possible.

Here, the prize distribution device 583 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60(a) and (b). 60(a) is a vertical sectional view of the prize distribution device 583 seen from the side, and FIG. 60(b) is a vertical sectional view of the prize distribution device 583 seen from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the distribution winning device 583 is formed with a distribution entrance 591 having a size that allows the game ball B1 to pass through, and the game ball B1 passes through the distribution entrance 591. An opening/closing member 592 on the distribution side is provided to switch between a closed state in which the ball is not allowed to pass and an open state in which the game ball B1 can pass through. The opening/closing member 592 on the distribution side is brought into an open state by being driven by the distribution entrance drive unit 593 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 591 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 594, and the game balls B1 that have flowed in from the distribution entrance 591 flow down the guide passage 594 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the guide passage 594 branches into two from a midpoint position, with an upstream area 595 forming an upstream side of the branching position, and one forming an upstream area 595 downstream of the branching position. It includes a V winning area 596 and a discharging area 597 forming the other downstream side of the branching position. Further, at the branch position, a shutter 598 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls B1 that have arrived at the branch position from the upstream area 595 to either the V winning area 596 or the discharge area 597. When the shutter 598 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 599, the game ball B1 that has reached the branching position flows into the ejection area 597, and the shutter 598 is driven by the shutter drive unit 599. Then, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position will flow into the V winning area 596.

A detection sensor 595a for counting is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the upstream area 595 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball B1 by the counting detection sensor 595a, the payout of prize balls corresponding to winnings to the distribution winning device 583 is executed. Further, a detection sensor 596a for V winning is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the V winning area 596 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball B1 by the V winning detection sensor 596a, the special electric winning device 32 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which it is opened and closed. Moreover, the detection sensor 597a for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the ejection area 597 always passes. Based on the detection results from the ejection detection sensor 597a and the V winning detection sensor 596a, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 remains in the distribution winning device 583.

Incidentally, the driving timing of the shutter drive unit 599 is set so that the winning game ball B1 in the prize distribution device 583 is guided to the V winning area 596 with a probability of 80%, but the specific probability is arbitrary, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of being guided to the discharge area 597 is higher. However, in order to increase the advantage of winning in the jackpot lottery based on winning in the second operating port 582, the probability of transitioning to the branch execution mode based on winning in the second operating port 582 and the prize distribution device The shutter 598 is moved so that the product of the probability that the winning game ball B1 enters the V winning area 596 is higher than the probability of winning in the jackpot lottery based on winning the first operating port 581. Preferably, a fractional probability is set. For example, it is preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning area 596 is set higher, and it is more preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning area 596 is 75% or more and less than 100%.

Further, it is preferable that the sorting winning device 583 is formed so that it is possible to visually confirm from the front of the pachinko machine 10 which of the V winning area 596 and the ejecting area 597 the winning game ball B1 is allocated to. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the prize distribution device 583 is formed to be colored and transparent or colorless and transparent.

In the branch execution mode, when the game ball B1 enters the distribution winning device 583, flows into the V winning area 596, and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a, a V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the branch execution mode, when the game ball B1 is not detected by the detection sensor 597a for V winning, the V winning does not occur.

Next, the winning lottery in this embodiment will be explained. First, the electrical configuration for performing the winning lottery in the main CPU 63 (FIG. 13) will be described.

The reservation storage area 65a (FIG. 13) of this embodiment includes a first reservation area and a second reservation area. The first holding area contains numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), the jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 13), and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 13) according to the winning history to the first operating port 581. The second reservation area is an area in which the combinations of are stored as reservation information, and the second reservation area stores the numerical values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 according to the winning history to the second operating port 582. This is an area where combinations of information are stored as pending information.

Up to four winning histories are held and stored in each of the first holding area and the second holding area. Each piece of numerical information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area is moved to the execution area AE (FIG. 13). At the start of one game round, the main CPU 63 executes a winning lottery based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Next, various tables used for the winning lottery will be explained. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a left-hand table for low frequency, a right-hand table for regular use, and a right-hand table for non-regular use as tables used for the winning lottery.

In each winning lottery table, the probability of a jackpot result is set to be the same. The high probability mode and low probability mode described in the first embodiment are not set in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, and the main side ROM 64 contains a left table for low frequency, a right table for regular use, and One type of each non-regular right table is stored.

First, the low frequency left table will be explained. When the support mode of the second operating port 582 is the low-frequency support mode, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area when a winning occurs in the first operation port 581 is the left-side reservation information for low frequency. do. The left-side hold information for low frequency includes information indicating that the hold information is stored during the low-frequency support mode and that the hold information is stored based on winning to the first operating port 581. There is. The left side table for low frequency is a table that is read when the pending information stored in the execution area AE is the left side pending information for low frequency.

In the low-frequency left table, only jackpot results are set, and small jackpot results are not set. The left side table for low frequency is set as a jackpot result, a high frequency result that becomes a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, and a low frequency result that becomes a low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

In the case where a winning occurs in the first operating port 581 in the low-frequency support mode and a jackpot result is obtained in the winning lottery based on the winning, the current jackpot result is a high-frequency result and the first implementation described above is performed. If "1" is not set in the high frequency flag described in the section, "1" is set in the high frequency flag. Further, if the current jackpot result is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". If the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high-frequency flag is set to "1", the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the value of the high-frequency flag becomes "0". ”, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the regular right-side table will be explained. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 582 in the high-frequency support mode, the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is set as regular right-side reservation information. The regular right-side reservation information includes information indicating that the reservation information is stored based on winnings to the second operating port 582 and that winnings to the second operating port 582 have occurred through a regular flow. include. The regular right-side reservation information is also stored in the second reservation area when a prize is won at the second operating port 582 during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode. The regular right side table is a table that is read when the pending information stored in the execution area AE is the regular right side pending information.

Here, the normal flow is to fire the game ball B1 toward the right area PA3, triggered by either the high-frequency support mode or the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode. This refers to the flow of the game in which operations are performed. On the other hand, in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the flow of the game in which the operation of firing the game ball B1 toward the right area PA3 is performed is defined as an irregular flow.

In the regular right table, jackpot results and small win results are set. In the regular right table, the above-mentioned high frequency results and low frequency results are set as jackpot results.

In the regular table on the right side, the probability of occurrence of a small win result is set so that even if the result is not a jackpot, the probability of a small win will be approximately 100%. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of occurrence of a small win result when the jackpot result is not obtained is set to 100%. In the regular right side table, high-frequency small win results and low-frequency small win results, which will be described later, are set as small win results.

If a prize is won to the second operating port 582 during either the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and a jackpot result is obtained in the winning lottery based on the prize, the current jackpot result When is a high frequency result and "1" is not set in the high frequency flag, "1" is set in the high frequency flag. Further, if the current jackpot result is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". If the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, if the current winning lottery results in a small win, if the current small win result is a high frequency small win result and the high frequency flag is not set to "1", the high frequency "1" is set in the flag. Further, if the current small win result is a low frequency small win result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". When a small winning result is obtained in the winning lottery, the game shifts to the above-mentioned branch execution mode, and when a V win occurs in the branch execution mode, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high-frequency flag is set to "1", the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the value of the high-frequency flag becomes "0". In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode. Further, when the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". Therefore, after the branch execution mode, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode brings about a state in which the normal power open winnings that open the second operating port 582 occur continuously. In this case, the winning lottery that is executed in response to a winning at the second operating port 582 is the same as the winning lottery that is executed in response to a winning in the second operating port 582 in the high-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the probability that a jackpot result will occur in a winning lottery using the low frequency left table is the same as the probability that a jackpot result will occur in a winning lottery using the regular right table. In addition, if there is no jackpot result in the winning lottery using the left side table for low frequency, it will be a loss result, whereas if there is no jackpot result in the winning lottery using the regular right table, it will be approximately 100%. % probability of transitioning to branch execution mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is a support mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high-frequency support mode.

Even in the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high-frequency support mode, when a consecutive winning period comes, the same winning lottery as in the high-frequency support mode is executed. As already explained in the first embodiment, the timing of occurrence of the winning consecutive period is not notified to the player. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, a situation may be advantageous to the player at a timing that the player does not expect. In this way, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player feel hopeful that a continuous winning period will occur.

Next, the non-regular right table will be explained. The reservation information stored in the second reservation area in response to winning at the second operating port 582 during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode is set as non-regular right-side reservation information. The non-regular right-side reservation information indicates that the reservation information is stored in response to a winning at the second operating port 582, and that the winning at the second operating port 582 occurred due to a non-regular flow. Contains information. The non-regular right table is a table that is read when the pending information stored in the execution area AE is non-regular right pending information.

In the non-regular right table, jackpot results and small win results are set. The jackpot results set in the non-regular right table are the above-mentioned low frequency results, and the small win results set in the non-regular right table are the above-mentioned low frequency small win results. In the non-regular right table, the probability of occurrence of a small win result is set so that if the result is not a jackpot result, the probability of a small win result is approximately 100%. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of occurrence of a small win result when the jackpot result is not obtained is set to 100%.

If a prize is won through the second operating port 582 during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning lottery is performed. If there is a jackpot result in the winning lottery, or a small win result and the branch execution mode is entered and a V-win occurs, the high frequency flag value is kept at "0" and the opening/closing operation is performed. Move to run mode. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode. Further, even when the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the value of the high frequency flag is maintained at "0", and the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

A player who does not accurately understand the flow of the game may unintentionally execute the irregular flow described above. As already explained in the first embodiment, the possibility of winning the general electricity release in the general electricity release lottery in the low frequency support mode is lower than the possibility of winning the general electricity release in the general electricity release lottery in the high frequency support mode. set lower than possible. For this reason, situations where games are played using an irregular flow are more disadvantageous for players than situations where games are played using a regular flow, and players who do not accurately grasp the flow of games may suffer losses. becomes.

On the other hand, even if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3 during the continuous non-winning period in the low frequency support mode, a winning to the second operating port 582 occurs. By configuring the system to shift to the branch execution mode with a high probability in such cases, it becomes possible to provide relief measures to players who do not accurately grasp the flow of the game. However, the configuration is such that the low-frequency support mode is always activated after the opening/closing execution mode is executed in an irregular flow. Thereby, it is possible to create a configuration in which playing a game with an irregular flow after understanding the flow of the game does not lead to an advantageous result for the player.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A winning lottery that is triggered by winning a prize in the second operating port 582 during the winning consecutive period in the low-frequency support mode, and a winning lottery that is triggered by a winning in the second operating port 582 in the high-frequency support mode. The lottery is performed based on a common regular table on the right side. In the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high-frequency support mode, by creating a configuration in which a state advantageous to the player occurs at a timing that the player does not expect, it becomes the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing mode. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the high-frequency support mode will be entered after the execution mode.

In a situation where there is a continuous non-winning period in the low frequency support mode, operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2 is better than operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. This configuration is more advantageous for the player than when operating the firing operation device 28. Even if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3 during the continuous non-winning period in the low frequency support mode, if a winning occurs in the second operating port 582, This is a configuration that transitions to the opening/closing execution mode with a high probability. Therefore, relief measures can be provided to inexperienced players who do not accurately understand the flow of the game.

During the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, there is a possibility that a high-frequency jackpot result and a high-frequency small win result will be obtained in the winning lottery that is triggered by winning the second operating port 582. During the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning lottery is held triggered by a winning in the second operating port 582 during the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, rather than a winning lottery that is triggered by a winning in the second operating port 582 during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode. A winning lottery in which the player is given a winning lottery is more likely to have an advantageous result for the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make the continuous winning period attractive and increase the interest of the game. Further, even if a player who knows the regular game flow dares to play a game using an irregular flow, the irregular flow is suppressed from leading to an advantageous result for the player.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
- In the sixth embodiment described above, if the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the support mode of the second operating port 582 may not change before and after the branch execution mode. If a winning occurs in the second operation port 582 and a small winning result is obtained in a winning lottery based on the winning, the system shifts to the branch execution mode while maintaining the value of the high frequency flag. Then, when a V winning does not occur in the branch execution mode, the current value of the high frequency flag is maintained as it is.

When a winning occurs in the second operating port 582 in the high-frequency support mode, "1" is set in the high-frequency flag at the time of the winning. The value of the high frequency flag is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without a small winning result in the winning lottery and no V winning. In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode.

Further, when a winning occurs in the second operating port 582 in the low frequency support mode, the value of the high frequency flag is "0" at the time of the winning. The value of the high frequency flag is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without a small winning result in the winning lottery and no V winning. In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode.

As described above, when the branch execution mode ends without a V winning, the support mode before entering the branch execution mode is maintained even after the branch execution mode is entered, thereby reducing the The continuous winning period in the frequent support mode can be made to be more advantageous to the player than the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, and more disadvantageous to the player than the high-frequency support mode. While maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, a continuous winning period can be set as a state advantageous to the player in the low-frequency support mode.

- During the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode in the sixth embodiment described above, the winning lottery with the same contents as the non-regular right table is entered in the winning lottery that is triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the second operating port 582. A configuration may also be adopted in which a continuation table is used. The jackpot results set in the continuous winning table are only low frequency results, and the small winning results set in the continuous winning table are only low frequency small winning results. Therefore, even if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a winning lottery based on the successive winning table, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode will not become the high-frequency support mode.

During the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery that is triggered by winning at the second operating port 582 is the same as the winning lottery that is executed by triggering a winning at the second operating port 582 in the high-frequency support mode. Compared to this, the winning lottery is disadvantageous to the player. Thereby, the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode can be maintained.

In the low-frequency support mode, if you play the game according to the regular flow, you can expect to shift to the opening/closing execution mode when a prize is won at the first operation port 581, and if there is a continuous winning period, It can be expected that the opening/closing execution mode will be triggered by the winning of the second operating port 582. On the other hand, if the game is played in an irregular manner, the player can only expect to shift to the opening/closing execution mode upon winning a prize at the second operation port 582. Further, the probability of occurrence of the general electricity open winning, which is a condition for winning the second operating port 582, is low. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, the advantage of playing a game using a regular flow over playing a game using an irregular flow is maintained, and a player who is aware of the flow of games intentionally The possibility of playing games through regular flow is reduced.

- In the sixth embodiment described above, if a winning occurs in the second through gate 39 in an irregular flow, a warning may be given to the player to play the game in a regular flow. . A warning to the player is given when a prize is won in the second through gate 39 during a consecutive non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, when detecting a win in the second through gate 39, the main CPU 63 determines that the value of the successive winning flag already explained in the first embodiment is "0" and that the high frequency Processing for transmitting a warning command to the audio emission control device 81 is executed on the condition that the value of the flag is "0". The audio emission control device 81 that has received the warning command sends a command to the display control device 82 to issue a warning to the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35. It is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker section 54 to output a sound warning the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who does not accurately understand the flow of the game will win a prize at the second operating port 582 using an irregular flow. Here, as already explained in the first embodiment, when the non-winning consecutive period shifts to the winning consecutive period in the low-frequency support mode, "1" is set in the winning consecutive flag. Therefore, when the winning consecutive period is triggered and the operation mode of the game ball launcher is changed so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3, no warning is given to the player.

- In the sixth embodiment described above, the opening manner of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode performed in an irregular flow is different from the opening manner of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode performed in a regular flow. You can also use it as When a winning occurs at the second operating port 582, the main CPU 63 controls the current winning sequence on the condition that the value of the continuous winning flag is "0" and the value of the high frequency flag is "0". ``1'' is set to an irregular flag indicating that the winning is a winning that occurred in an irregular flow. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, if the non-regular flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 executes the opening/closing operation of the special electric winning device 32 in the non-regular mode, and sets the non-regular flag to "1". If not set, the opening/closing operation of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed in the regular mode. In the non-regular mode, compared to the regular mode, the closing time from the end of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 to the next open state is set to be longer. Therefore, in the non-regular mode, the amount of game balls B1 consumed during the opening/closing execution mode is larger than in the regular mode. Perform a firing operation so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2 during the continuous non-winning period of the low frequency support mode, and fire the game ball B1 so that it flows down the right area PA3 when the winning continuous period comes. The regular flow of switching operations is more advantageous for the player than the irregular flow of firing operations such that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 during the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who is aware of the flow of the game from intentionally playing the game using an irregular flow.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for ejecting the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 and the inclination of the opening of the first through gate 35 in the game board 610. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 620 in this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 61. The adjustment mechanism 620 periodically supplies game balls B1 to the first through gate 35. FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board 610 showing the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610 of this embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 620 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the adjustment mechanism 620 of this embodiment, the accommodating portion 181 includes a left side upright wall 181h and a right side upright wall 181d described in the first embodiment, and accommodates the rotating body 183. The storage space is divided into sections.

The left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 61, since the left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d are spaced apart, the intake port 185 described in the first embodiment is present in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620. , a discharge port 621 is present at the lower right portion of the adjustment mechanism 620. As shown in FIG. 61, the discharge port 621 has a width that is one size larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 61, the adjustment mechanism 620 includes the adjustment drive section 184 described in the first embodiment above behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive section 184 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12). In this embodiment, the adjustment drive unit 184 is supplied with a drive signal and enters a drive state, thereby slowly rotating the rotating body 183 clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° for 5 seconds.

When any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward at the intake port 185 located at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 is in a state where it can take in the game ball B1. At the same time, when any of the recesses 183b to 183e is opened to the lower right at the outlet 621 located at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 can eject the game ball B1. state.

The duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in at the intake port 185 and the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged at the discharge port 621 are determined depending on the rotational speed of the rotating body 183. When the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is slow, the time during which the recesses 183b to 183e are open to the outside at the intake port 185 and the discharge port 621 becomes longer. This extends the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in and the state in which it can be ejected.

In this embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be sufficiently slow so that the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the discharge port 621 continues until the discharge of the game ball B1 is completed. The flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port 621 is the same even when the discharged game ball B1 is taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e. For this reason, below, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 will be explained with reference to FIG. 61, taking the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b as an example.

As shown in FIG. 61, the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b and conveyed clockwise in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a is connected to the discharge port 621 and the first recess 183b at the lower right part of the adjustment mechanism 620. are overlapped and the first recessed portion 183b is opened toward the lower right, and is discharged.

Specifically, as the rotating body 183 rotates, even if the first recessed part 183b begins to overlap the discharge port 621, the width of the area opened to the outside in the first recessed part 183b is If it is narrower than the diameter of B1, the game ball B1 in the first recessed part 183b will not be discharged to the outside. In this state, the game ball B1 in the first recessed part 183b is supported by the inner wall of the first recessed part 183b and the right standing wall 181d, so that it is prevented from falling downward.

As the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed part 183b supporting the game ball B1 and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer, so that the first recessed part 183b is opened to the outside. The width of the area becomes wider. Then, when the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right side standing wall 181d becomes longer than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward.

When the rotation of the rotating body 183 is fast, the rotation of the rotating body occurs after the first concave portion 183b is opened to the outside at the discharge port 621 until the game ball B1 is actually discharged. 183 continues to rotate, and the game ball B1 that is being ejected is caught between the rotating body 183 and the left standing wall 181h, or the first recessed part 183b is opened to the outside before the game ball B1 is ejected. There is a possibility that it may end. In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be sufficiently slow. For this reason, the game ball B1 is ejected from the time when the first recessed portion 183b is opened to the outside until the end of this state.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the intake port 185 is an intake port that can take in the game ball B1 when any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward. It will be in a permission state. When the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the duration of one intake permission state at the intake port 185 becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the taking-in permission state ends without any game balls B1 being taken into the upwardly open recesses 183b to 183e. Thereby, when the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches the discharge timing, it is possible to reduce the frequency of a state in which there is no game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 toward the first through gate 35.

As already explained in the first embodiment, only one game ball B1 can be taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 during one taking-in permission state. . If the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the frequency with which the adjustment mechanism 620 enters the capture permission state per unit time decreases, and therefore the number of game balls B1 that the adjustment mechanism 620 can capture per unit time also decreases. That will happen.

On the other hand, as already explained in the first embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 620 moves the game ball B1 that has flowed down near the intake port 185 between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181h. Alternatively, it can be discharged into the left and right spaces of the adjustment mechanism 180 from between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d, and can also be discharged from the passage entrance 171 provided at the rear of the intake port 185 toward the escape passage 172. be able to. Therefore, even if the number of game balls B1 that have flown down to the vicinity of the intake port 185 and are not taken into the intake port 185 increases, the game balls B1 can be prevented from staying near the intake port 185.

Moreover, as already explained, the discharge port 621 is present at the lower right part of the adjustment mechanism 620, and the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620 rotates 180 degrees around the center of the rotating body 183. It is discharged to the outside at a faster timing. The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620 does not rotate more than 180 degrees around the center of the rotating body 183. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has reached the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 620 will not rise again due to the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 61, the left standing wall 181h includes an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 falling downward from the discharge port 621. The end surface 181i is inclined downwardly toward the right, and comes into contact with the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 to guide the game ball B1 to the lower right.

As already explained, the width of the discharge port 621 is about one size wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, and is set relatively narrow. Therefore, variations in the discharge start position of the game balls B1 at the discharge port 621 can be suppressed to a small level. Further, since the dispersion start position of the game balls B1 has small variations, most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 261. Thereby, variations in the ejection direction of the game balls B1 can be suppressed to a small level.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610, the first through gate 35 is located below the discharge port 621. The distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is set to be one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Due to the existence of a gap between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35 through which the game ball B1 can pass, there is a possibility that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 may come off the first through gate 35. There is. For example, if the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 deviates to the left or right and the game ball B1 collides with the edge of the first through gate 35, a prize to the first through gate 35 will occur. There is a possibility that it will not.

By avoiding a configuration in which all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enter the first through gate 35, it is avoided that the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 620 is limited to only taking in the game balls B1. can. In addition, by setting the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 short, the effect of the discharge speed of the game ball B1 on the timing when the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 enters the first through gate 35. can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first through gate 35 in this embodiment facilitates entry of the game ball B1, which falls downward to the right while being guided by the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 181h, at the discharge port 621. In order to do this, the game board 610 is provided in such a manner that it slopes downwardly toward the left.

As shown in FIG. 61, at the discharge port 621, the game ball B1, which is guided by the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 181h and discharged toward the lower right, gradually corrects its course downward due to the influence of gravitational force. while falling. The inclination angle of the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately perpendicular to the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 at the height position of the first through gate 35. This increases the possibility that the game ball B1 will smoothly enter the prize without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35. By preventing the game ball B1 from coming into contact with the edge of the first through gate 35 immediately before winning the first through gate 35, the winning timing of the game ball B1 that comes into contact with the edge of the first through gate 35 is shifted, The possibility that the game ball B1 will come off the first through gate 35 can be reduced.

As already explained, since the dispersion in the discharge start position and the dispersion direction of the game balls B1 at the discharge port 621 are kept small, most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 are transferred to the first through gate 35. You can smoothly win the prize.

Next, a low-frequency winning determination value table in this embodiment will be explained. As explained in the first embodiment, the low-frequency winning determination value table stored in the main side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) includes the following information: The winning determination value that is subject to is recorded. The low-frequency winning determination value table of this embodiment includes the winning determination values set in the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 described with reference to FIG. 14(a) in the first embodiment. are set to different values.

In the low-frequency winning determination value table of this embodiment, the winning determination value for the general electricity open lottery is set to (1250×n−5) to (1250×n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability of winning the general electricity release lottery in the general electricity release lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is approximately 1/210.

The winning determination values that are subject to the general electricity open winning are serially numbered in units of six. Further, the update cycle of the random number for release in the utility power release counter C4 (FIG. 13) is 4 msec. Therefore, in the utility power supply release counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for release becomes the winning determination value for the utility power release winning target in the utility power release lottery in the low-frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

In the low-frequency support mode, the winning target period in which the winning determination value that is the target of the general electricity open winning continues for 24 msec occurs at a cycle of 5 seconds. As mentioned above, the cycle at which the winning timing when the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 620 enters the first through gate 35 occurs is 5 seconds, which is the same as the cycle at which the winning period occurs in the low-frequency support mode. be.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the winning timing overlaps with the winning period, resulting in a continuous winning period in which general electricity open winnings occur consecutively. The winning consecutive period continues until the initial value of the general electric utility object release counter C4 is updated and the timing of occurrence of the winning target period is shifted. If the timing of occurrence of the winning period is shifted, there will be a continuous non-winning period in which losing results continue in the general power open lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode until the winning period overlaps again with the winning timing.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The discharge port 621 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches before rotating 180 degrees around the center of the rotating body 183. In addition, in the discharge port 621, when the game ball B1 can be discharged from the recesses 183b to 183e, the adjustment drive unit 184 is configured so that the state does not end before the discharge of the game ball B1 is completed. Drive controlled. This prevents the game ball B1 transported downward from the top of the adjustment mechanism 620 from rotating more than 180 degrees around the center of the rotating body 183 and rising again.

The left standing wall 181h includes an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 that is about to fall downward from the discharge port 621 due to its own weight and guides the game ball B1 to the lower right. Further, the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be relatively narrow, there is little variation in the discharge start position of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621, and most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 are placed in a left standing position. It can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the wall 261 and guided to the lower right. Therefore, variations in the discharge direction of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 can be reduced.

The variation in the discharge start position of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 is small, and the variation in the discharge direction is also small. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 falls to the height position of the first through gate 35, the variation in the moving direction is also small. The first through gate 35 opens downwardly toward the left so as to form an opening perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 and flowing down to the height position of the first through gate 35. It is sloping. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 is easily taken in smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35. This prevents the game ball B1 from colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35 just before winning the first through gate 35, causing the winning timing to shift or coming off from the first through gate 35.

The distance from the discharge port 621 of the adjustment mechanism 620 to the first through gate 35 is set to be one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since there is a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35, all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enter the first through gate 35. can be avoided. In addition, since the distance from the ejection port 621 to the first through gate 35 is relatively short, even if the game ball B1 is ejected at a different ejection speed each time, the difference in ejection speed will determine the winning timing at the first through gate 35. It is possible to have a configuration that does not have a large impact on As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which, during the continuous winning period, the winning timing at the first through gate 35 is shifted due to the difference in the discharging speed, and the general power open winning is not achieved.

<Eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input to the third buffer 122c, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, Although the configuration is such that the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in this embodiment. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as an opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as a high-frequency support mode signal. , the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

An opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and It was decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 inputs the output instruction signal to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, the types of signals input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized (step S1701). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S1702). In the output processing, the respective output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 ( Step S1703). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to 12th buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal is determined. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as . The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to 122l, in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal.

In step S1703, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the payout of the game ball will not be executed, so the output number counter will not be executed. Set "0" to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry part does not exist and is blank, so the output number counter is set to "0".

Thereafter, output processing of a start trigger signal is executed (step S1704). In the output process, output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1705: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S1703, The process advances to step S1706. In step S1706, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1707), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1708). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1708: NO), the process returns to step S1706.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1709). In the output process, output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1710), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1711). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1711: NO), the process returns to step S1703 and executes processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1711: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S1712). In the output processing, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the 14th buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the process advances to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal is being received (step S1804: YES), the value of the reception frequency counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1805). The reception frequency counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804, or if the process in step S1805 is executed, it is determined whether a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1806). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1806: NO), the process returns to step S1804, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S1806: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1807). In the correspondence setting process, the reception counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Store the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, second correspondence area 123b, and third correspondence area 123c, and "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the fourth correspondence area 123d. is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first actuation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the area 123f. Further, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1808).

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process in step S1808 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S1809). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S1809: NO), the process returns to step S1803, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the processing from step S1804 onward is performed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S1809: YES), the history setting process of step S1810 and the external output process of step S1811 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 65 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 65(a) shows a period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(b) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, and FIG. 65(c) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level. ) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(d) shows the period when the output state of the signal during the opening/closing execution mode is at HI level, and FIG. 65(e) shows the period when the output state of the signal is at HI level. FIG. 65(f) shows the period during which the output state of the signal is at HI level during the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 65(g) shows the timing at which the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 65(h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1807) is executed by the management CPU 112 is shown.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, at timing t1, the first signal , the output states of the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1801 of the management process (FIG. 64), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 65(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 65(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, at timing t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 65(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 65(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 65(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "1" is stored as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in FIG. 65(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the second The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, each type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG. 65(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 65(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 65(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "10" is stored as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

After that, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 65(c), 65(d), and 65(e), the output state of the third signal, opening/closing execution mode signal, and high-frequency support mode signal becomes LOW. level is changed to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1809 of the management process (FIG. 64), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 65(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball part that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of objects is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple types of ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry parts in the history information. Specifically, since both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 have one prize ball, it is difficult to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the historical information even in a configuration in which historical information is stored as in the eighth embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "15". As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal but also the information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door Regarding the information corresponding to whether the frame 14 is open or not, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is information that requires the main CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g from the management CPU 112. Become. When the correspondence relationship information is to be recognized by the management side CPU 112, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the timing at which calculations of various parameters using history information are executed. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 66 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are similar to those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is also provided with a memory 631 for calculation results. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 631. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The trigger for calculating various parameters occurs before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to vary the timing at which various parameters are calculated and the timing at which they are externally output to the reading device, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since a calculation result memory 631 is provided to store the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers at once. It is possible to remember it. This makes it possible to reduce the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation occasion.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input to the third buffer 122c, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted to the eighth buffer 122h, and the ninth signal is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, similar to the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p is inputted to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the information. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the power outage information storage process, if a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board 67 (step S1901: YES), output processing of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1902). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Thereafter, in step S1903, after executing a power outage process, an infinite loop is created and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power outage response process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 34), and in the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1006: YES), step S1007 is executed. The history setting process in step S1008, the external output process in step S1008, and the power outage response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power outage response process, if the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2001: YES), in steps S2002 to S2006, the external output in the first embodiment is Similarly to steps S1602 to S1606 of the processing (FIG. 40), calculate the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. . Further, in step S2007, similarly to step S1607 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of each type of entering balls in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2008, various parameters are calculated similarly to step S1608 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2009, the external output processing in the first embodiment is performed. Similar to step S1609 of the process (FIG. 40), the total time is calculated. Then, information on the calculation result in step S2008 and information on the calculation result in step S2009 are written into the calculation result memory 631 (step S2010). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S2011, similarly to step S1611 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of entering balls of each type during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S2012, the number of balls entered in the first Similarly to step S1612 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the embodiment, the number of various types of balls entering is calculated in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open. Further, in step S2013, various parameters are calculated similarly to step S1613 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result in step S2014 is written into the calculation result memory 631 (step S2014). In this case, information on the calculation results is written so as not to overwrite information on other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S2015, similarly to step S1615 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of balls entering each type during the high-frequency support mode is calculated, and in step S2016, the number of balls entered in the above-mentioned Similar to step S1616 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of each type of incoming balls is calculated in the high-frequency support mode and when the front door frame 14 is open. Further, in step S2017, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1617 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result in step S2017 is written into the calculation result memory 631 (step S2018). In this case, information on the calculation results is written so as not to overwrite information on other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. Thereafter, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2101: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S2102). In the output processing, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 631, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. If various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 631, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S2103). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various kinds of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the historical information in this way, it becomes possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clearing processing is executed (step S2104). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. In the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 631 are cleared to "0". This brings the calculation result memory 631 into an initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This allows the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written into the calculation result memory 631. This makes it possible to accumulate various parameters in the management IC 66, and when reading various parameters with a reading device, it becomes possible to read out various parameters for a plurality of business days at once.

When various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 631, information that makes it possible to specify when the various parameters were calculated is written to the calculation result memory 631 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping when various parameters were calculated.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be configured to be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the calculation trigger are written to the calculation result memory 631. This makes it difficult for new history information to be written into the history memory 117 in a situation where the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in the history memory 117.

Alternatively, the information to be externally outputted to the reading device may be only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be outputted externally. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in the processing configuration of the power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the ninth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2201: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2202). In the various calculation processes, steps S2002 to S2009, steps S2011 to S2013, and steps S2015 to S2017 of the power outage response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2202 is within the reference range (step S2203). in particular,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 '') are set as parameters to be determined whether or not they are within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2203.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. for example,
-Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, when the value of the second parameter is greater than or equal to 0.1 and less than or equal to 0.2, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range. Alternatively, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2203 may be calculated in the various calculation processes in step S2202.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2203: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2202 are written into the calculation result memory 631 (step S2204). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2203: YES), the process of step S2204 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when a predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written into the calculation result memory 631. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the history thereof can be left in the calculation result memory 631, and the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 631 can be suppressed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, or if the process in step S2204 is executed, a process to clear the history memory 117 is executed (step S2205). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. After executing the process in step S2205, an infinite loop is created and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range or not, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 631. written. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 631, and it becomes possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the calculation result memory 631.

<Eleventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the ninth embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the ninth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 72(a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

It is determined whether a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, an increment process is performed for a ball entry counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S2302). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated in the current processing round. The identification is made based on the number of times step S1305 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 36). Then, the identified number of game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2303). If it is "500" or more (step S2303: YES), subtraction processing of the ball entry counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2304). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. Thereafter, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2305). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 72(b) is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is a process that is executed instead of the power outage response process in the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 34), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), step S1207 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process of step S1208, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2401: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2402). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power outage response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage aspects in detail.

In addition, since the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters can be calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

<Twelfth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment described above in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

It is determined whether a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2501). When a negative determination is made in step S2501, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2502). The continuation counter is a period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. This is a counter for specifying.

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2503: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2504). If the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503. The stopping reference value is set as follows. Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure time to specify the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of the time measurement flag is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2505).

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, if the process of step S2504 is executed, or if the process of step S2505 is executed, the condition is that the time measurement flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Step S2506: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2507). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time to specify the timing to switch the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S2508). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2508 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2509), and a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2510). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated every time a predetermined period of time elapses, so it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where no game is being played, and when the game round is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation where a game is being played.

Note that instead of a configuration in which whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed is measured using a measurement counter, a configuration may be adopted in which the RTC 115 is used to measure.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters is different from the first embodiment, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the calculation trigger has occurred. This is performed independently by the management CPU 112 instead of by the CPU 112 on the management side. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1412 in the history setting process (FIG. 37).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether the history information to be stored has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, an increment process is performed on the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2602). In this addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated in this processing round. This is determined based on the number of times that history information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball being entered is stored in the history setting process. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2603). If it is greater than or equal to "500" (step S2603: YES), subtraction processing of the ball entry counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2605). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power outage response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage aspects in detail.

In addition, since the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters can be calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

In addition, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the timing for calculating various parameters is independently determined by the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the triggers for calculation of various parameters, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a memory 631 for calculation results (see FIG. 66). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters resulting from the calculation into the calculation result memory 631. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is A signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed, a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. sent to.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that they correspond to any of the ball entry sections, and the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode starts. Corresponding information is stored, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode. The information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, and the information corresponding to the start of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. , information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2701, the check target counter is set to "13".

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2702). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the 10th buffer 122j is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2703). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2703 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the 10th correspondence area 123j is the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2705). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2706).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2706: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2707). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters and total time information of the calculation results are written into the calculation result memory 631 (step S2708). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, status information inheritance processing is executed (step S2709). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current status is in the opening/closing execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. Determine whether or not. Then, the status information is written to the management side RAM 114.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2710). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. Further, after executing the clearing process, the state information written to the management side RAM 114 in step S2709 is read. If state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. At the same time as writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, if status information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect is stored, history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect is written in the history information storage area corresponding to the target pointer information. 125, and 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written corresponding to the pointer information targeted for writing. It is written into the history information storage area 125, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative determination is made in step S2702, if a negative determination is made in step S2706, or if the process of step S2710 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2712). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2712: NO), the process from step S2702 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which history information exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117 and becomes a storage target, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

Furthermore, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subjected to calculations of various parameters from becoming a calculation target of various parameters again.

Furthermore, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information inheritance process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage state information.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 641, a first state area 642, a second state area 643, and a third state area 644. First to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o are provided in each of these areas 641 to 644, respectively. The first counters 641a to 644a of each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 641b to 644b of each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 641c to 644c of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 641d to 644d of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 641e to 644e in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 641f to 644f of each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 641g to 644g of each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 641h to 644h of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 641i to 644i of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 641j to 644j of the respective areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh counters 641k to 644k of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 641l to 644l of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 641m to 644m of the respective areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 641n to 644n of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 641o to 644o of the respective areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the 1st to 15th counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o are the outlet 24a, the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the first operation. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g into which signals corresponding to the result of the ball entering either the opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 are input. Therefore, signals corresponding to status information such as whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are input to the eighth to eighth channels. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the above measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not it is a measurement target is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. As already explained in this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, "10" is set in the counter to be checked in step S2801. do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current counters to be checked are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2802). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, a state information setting process is executed (step S2803). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. The information on the first state is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the 10th signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is provided. is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the buffer is stored in a buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and into which a signal of information different from the status information is input. By checking whether the numerical information displayed has been changed from "0" to "1", it can be determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2804). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2805). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth total counters 641a to 641o in the total area 641 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 641e for totaling is the target of addition, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 641a for totaling is the target of addition. .

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2806). If it is in the first state (step S2806: YES), an addition process of the counter for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2807). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 642a to 642o for the first state in the first state area 642 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 642e for the first state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 642a for the first state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether it is in the high-frequency support mode (step S2808). If it is in the second state (step S2808: YES), an addition process of the counter for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2809). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 643a to 643o for the second state in the second state area 643 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 643e for the second state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 643a for the second state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is present, that is, whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S2810). In the case of the third state (step S2810: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2811). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 644a to 644o for the third state in the third state area 644 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 644e for the third state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 644a for the third state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

If the process of step S2803 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2804, if a negative determination is made in step S2810, or if the process of step S2811 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2812). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2813). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2813: NO), the processes from step S2802 onwards are executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is set as described above. Rather than being stored as history information like in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

With this configuration in which the information is stored as the number of times a game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a, in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment, the output port 24a such as step S1602 is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 such as step S1604, a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 such as step S1605. The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34, such as step S1606, become unnecessary. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In addition, in the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 such as step S1603, the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c are all in the general winning hole. 31, it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c. Furthermore, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls that enter the ball in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open during the opening/closing execution mode from the number of balls that enter the ball in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment, the process of step S1612 is not executed. Similarly, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls that enter the system in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open during the high-frequency support mode from the number of balls that enter the ball that occurs in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment, the process of step S1616 is not executed.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the storage means in which history information is stored. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, and a management RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631 as in the twelfth embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the history of balls entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, in which information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is temporarily stored, is also used as a memory for storing ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main RAM 65 and reads out the ball entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 631. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 631, but the ball entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ball entry detection processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball entry detection process is executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the information of “0” is stored to the situation where the information of “1” is stored for the 0th bit D0, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2901: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2902). The general prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning hole 31 as a ball entering history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 with the reading device. By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter will not change even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Memory is retained. Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2903).

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2904: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2905). Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2906).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2907: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2908). Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the situation where information of "0" is stored to the situation where information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S2910: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2911). Further, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2912). The special electric winning prize counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entering history. The value of the special electric prize winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 with the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the special electric winning counter will not change. Memory is retained. Thereafter, the value of the 15 prize balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2913).

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects the state of "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2914: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2915). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2916). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 with the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter will not change even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. is retained in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2917).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2918: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2919). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2920). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 with the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter will not change even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. is retained in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2921).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the output detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2922: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2923). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the out counter will not be memorized. Retained.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first gate detection sensor 49a detects one It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S2924: YES). In this case, the first gate winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2925).

When it is confirmed that the 8th bit D8 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second gate detection sensor 50a detects one It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S2926: YES). In this case, the second gate winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2927).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the entry history of balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined by each ball entering section. The number of balls entered is stored in the main side RAM 65. As a result, each time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls that entered the general winning hole 31 from the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that entered the general winning hole 31 from the special winning prize counter in the main side RAM 65 to the special electric winning prize device 32. Read the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 from the first operating counter of the main side RAM 65, read the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 from the second operating counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter in the main side RAM 65. Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated using each of the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of each entering ball is not measured while distinguishing between the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is closed. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated including the number of balls that enter the ball when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, each number of balls entering during the opening/closing execution mode and each number of balls entering during the high-frequency support mode are not measured individually, so the first to 18th parameters and the 21st parameter described in the first embodiment are ~The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 631. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 631 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 631 is cleared to "0".

Note that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but the information on the number of balls entered, which is stored as the entry history in the main RAM 65, is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the way the ball entry history is stored in each ball entry section. ing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, unlike the first embodiment. Also. The main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 651 in addition to the MPU 62 . The notification light emitting section 651 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using information about the history of ball entry into each ball entry section read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting section 651 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The notification light emitting unit 651 is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main controller 60, but the board box 60a is formed transparent and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is not visible outside the board box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 651 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, by opening the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and making it possible to visually check the main control device 60, the notification light emitting section 651 can be opened without the need for opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of the light.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, Although the configuration is such that the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, in this embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and the front A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. In other words, signals related to the ball entry history are not input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs the output to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o. The first buffer counter 652a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The second buffer counter 652b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third buffer counter 652c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth buffer counter 652d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth buffer counter 652e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The sixth buffer counter 652f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh buffer counter 652g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth buffer counter 652h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth buffer counter 652i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The tenth buffer counter 652j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 652k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 652l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 13th buffer counter 652m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th buffer counter 652n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 15th buffer counter 652o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g into which signals corresponding to the result of the ball entering the corner are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not it is a measurement target is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than the information indicating blankness is stored in the first to seventh reception related areas 123a to 123j, so in step S3001, the counter to be checked is set to "7". do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer 122a is to be checked for numerical information. .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, addition processing for the corresponding buffer counters 652a to 652o is executed (step S3003). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer counter 652e is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer counter 652a is to be added.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, or if the process in step S3003 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3004). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3005). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3005: NO), the processes from step S3002 onwards are executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is set as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3101: YES), the output target counters provided in the management RAM 114 include the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652a. Among the counters 652o, the number of counters to which frequency information is output is set in the management CPU 112 (step S3102). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, as already explained, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, the output target counter is set to "7" in step S3102. .

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S3103), and the history The number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o in the memory 117 is read out (step S3104). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 652a to 652o reads the number of times information. Targeted. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 652e becomes the target for reading the number information, and the value of the output target counter becomes the target for reading the correspondence information. If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the object of reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 652a becomes the object of reading the number information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S3105). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S3103 and the number of times information read in step S3104 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number of times information regarding the correspondence information that is currently being output.

Thereafter, the value of the output target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3106). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S3107). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3107: NO), the processes from step S3103 onwards are executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S221 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, it is determined whether an opportunity to calculate various parameters has occurred (step S3201). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and similarly to the 11th embodiment, the output opening 24a, the general prize opening 31, and the special winning prize This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 exceeds 500, which is the trigger reference number. Since the first time the parameter management process is executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and then turning it on again. It becomes possible to easily generate an opportunity. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, a notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as described later, so that by simply turning the power off and on, It becomes possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball enters the ball. In addition, by configuring a configuration in which a calculation trigger occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the game reaches the trigger standard number of 500 or more, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA. becomes.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S3201: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counter that is the storage target of the ball entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o of the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 652a to 652g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counters 652a to 652o from which the ball entry history is read based on the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S3203). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3202 and information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main side CPU 63 uses the program and data stored in the main side ROM 64 so that each ball entry history read out in step S3202 is set to the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the first operating hole 33. It is possible to specify which of the two operating ports 34 corresponds, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S3202.

Specifically regarding the various parameters calculated in step S3203,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”) is calculated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the first range (step S3204). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are determined to be within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3204. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S3205). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 651 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3204, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the second range (step S3206). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3206. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S3207). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 651 emits yellow light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3206, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, a third notification state setting process is executed (step S3208). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 651 emits red light.

The light emitting state set in step S3205, step S3207, or step S3208 is set until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 651, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 651 is stopped. Continue until. Furthermore, since the notification state of the notification light emitting section 651 is stored and held in the main side RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and the notification state of the notification light emitting section is 651 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponds to the type of notification state information stored in the main RAM 65. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 651 is provided to notify contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so the game hall manager etc. do not have to read out the information stored in the history memory 117, but the game ball information in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the manner in which the ball enters the ball.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with a notification light emitting section 651 together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting section 651.

Calculations of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting section 651.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is entered, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is entered, and the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range. A third notification state is entered when the device does not correspond to either the first range or the second range. That is, the various parameters are not reported as they are, but the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting section 651 from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting section 651.

Note that even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 651 is continued, so that immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting state in is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 651, it is possible to understand the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA. .

In addition, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting section 651 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Alternatively, the notification light emitting section 651 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 651 in the game hall before the start of business, it becomes possible to grasp the state of the game balls entering the game ball on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light emitting section 651, and may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker section 54. It may be. Further, a configuration may also be adopted in which signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally outputted to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the ordinary figure display section 38a of the ordinary figure unit 38 may also have a function as the notification light emitting section 651. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, second range, or other range as in the above embodiment, A configuration may also be adopted in which notification corresponding to the calculation result is executed on the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a immediately after the start of supply of operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when a condition for starting the variable display of the symbol in the special symbol display section 37a or a condition for starting a variable display of the symbol in the regular symbol display section 38a is satisfied. It may be configured such that the process is temporarily interrupted when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to use the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a as a notification means for notifying the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA.

The notification light emitting section 651 may be provided at a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting part 651 may be provided at a position that is behind the window panel 52 of the pachinko machine 10 and is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it becomes possible to check the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring an opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch route SL21 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the first signal route SL11, and the first branch route SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch route SL22 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the second signal route SL12, and the second branch route SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch route SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal route SL13, and the third branch route SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch route SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal route SL14, and the fourth branch route SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch route SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal route SL15, and the fifth branch route SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch route SL26 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the sixth signal route SL16, and the sixth branch route SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch route SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal route SL17, and the seventh branch route SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main side CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. Since there is no need to do this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Furthermore, the branch points of each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. .

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the discharge adjustment means for periodically discharging the captured game balls B1 is provided above the first through gate 35, but the arrangement of the discharge adjustment means is not limited to this. Here, the discharge adjustment means refers to the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 330 in the fourth embodiment. This is a general term for the adjustment mechanism 430 in the fifth embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. For example, instead of the second through gate 39 in each of the above embodiments, there is an opening into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening that is open upward, and a first opening that can be switched between an open state and a closed state. In a game board including a second opening which is an opening provided with an opening/closing means that can be opened and closed, the discharge adjustment means may be arranged above the first opening and the second opening.

Specifically, in the game board, the first opening and the second opening are provided on the right side of the game area. The discharge adjustment means is located above the first opening, and only game balls discharged from the discharge adjustment means can enter the first opening. The opening/closing means for the second opening prohibits the game ball from entering the second opening in the closed state. A game ball is taken into the discharge adjustment means, and when the game ball is discharged from the discharge adjustment means and enters the first opening, the opening/closing means switches from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball's first 2, the ball can enter the opening. The open state of the opening/closing means continues for a predetermined period of time, and if the number of game balls entering the second opening reaches a predetermined number of times during the predetermined period, an advantageous benefit is given to the player.

In order to shift the opening/closing means from the closed state to the open state, it is necessary for the player to shoot a game ball at the discharge adjustment means. Furthermore, in order to make the game ball enter the second opening a predetermined number of times, the player needs to shoot the game ball aiming at the second opening. In this way, the player aims and shoots the game ball, and when a predetermined result is achieved, advantageous benefits are given to the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of participation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, by limiting the timing of the game ball entering the first opening using the discharge adjustment means, it is possible to avoid a situation where the opening/closing means is frequently opened. In other words, by using the discharge adjustment means, it is possible to appropriately manage the interval at which the opening/closing means shifts to the open state.

(2) The discharge adjustment means in each of the above embodiments may be provided above the first operating port 33, and the lottery mode by the winning/failure lottery means may be configured to be only one type. Here, the discharge adjustment means refers to the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 330 in the fourth embodiment. This is a general term for the adjustment mechanism 430 in the fifth embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the main side CPU 63 drives and controls the discharge adjustment means so that the discharge possible period during which the captured game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first operating port 33 occurs in a 1-sec cycle. . The main side ROM 64 stores a validity determination table in which determination values for winning a jackpot are set in the validity determination process. As already explained, the success/failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not the pending information corresponds to a jackpot win, and is executed in the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). This is a process that In the success/failure determination table, (1250×n−5) to (1250×n) are set as determination values for winning a jackpot. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability of winning the jackpot after the success/failure determination process is executed is approximately 1/210. In the first operating port 33, the jackpot target period in which the reservation information acquired when the game ball B1 wins is a jackpot winning target occurs at a 5-sec cycle and continues for 24 msec. If the discharge possible period in the discharge adjustment means does not correspond to the jackpot target period, a jackpot result will not be obtained in the success/failure determination process. In this case, by updating the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), there is a possibility that the discharge period corresponds to the jackpot target period. When the discharge period corresponds to the jackpot target period, there is a high probability of winning the jackpot in the win/fail determination process. Specifically, if the ejection of the game ball B1 from the ejection adjustment means toward the first operating port 33 is performed without fail at a 1-sec cycle, a prize will be won to the first operating port 33 once in five times. Eligible for jackpot winning. In this way, by configuring the discharge adjustment means to create a situation in which a jackpot is likely to occur and a situation in which a jackpot does not occur in the win/fail judgment process, the player's influence on the behavior of the game ball B1 around the discharge adjustment means It is possible to attract interest and improve the interest of the game.

(3) The structure for preventing the game ball B1 from rising and staying as described in each of the above embodiments may be applied to the member for distributing the game ball B1 to either of the two paths.

Specifically, the game board is provided with a prize distribution device. A winning lottery is executed when a winning occurs in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Among these, if a small win is won in the winning lottery executed in response to a winning at the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, when a V winning occurs, the special electric winning device 32 becomes an open/close execution mode in which it is in an open state.

The prize distribution device includes an upstream passage, and the upstream passage branches into a V winning passage and a discharge passage in a branching space. The upstream passage, the V winning passage, and the discharge passage have a passage cross section that allows one game ball B1 to pass through and that makes it impossible for a plurality of game balls B1 to pass through at the same time. There is. The upstream passage is formed in a downward straight line around the branch space. Further, in the periphery of the branch space, an inlet of the discharge passage is provided directly below the outlet of the upstream passage. For this reason, when the game ball B1 that has linearly flowed down the upstream passage around the branch space continues downward, it enters the discharge passage.

In the branch space, a switching member is provided below the upstream passage and above the discharge passage. The switching member includes a rotation shaft, a plate-shaped switching piece that rotates around the rotation axis from an initial position to a displacement position, and a switching piece that switches from the initial position to the displacement position based on a signal from the main CPU 63. and a switching drive section that switches from the displaced position to the initial position. When the switching piece is in the initial position, the switching piece is in a first state extending downward. In the first state, the discharge passage is opened upward. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down the upstream passage enters the discharge passage.

On the other hand, when the switching piece is in the displaced position, the switching piece is in the second state extending diagonally forward to the left. In the second state, since the switching piece is present above the discharge passage, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage comes into contact with the switching piece. In the second state, the contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, the course of the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the switching piece moves forward. The V winning passage is formed in such a manner that the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the switching piece in the second state enters in front of the discharge passage. Therefore, when the switching drive unit switches the switching piece to the displacement position, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage is guided to the V winning passage. The sorting prize winning device is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 flowing down the V winning path, and when the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor, a V prize is awarded.

The V winning passage is separated from the discharge passage by a plate-shaped partition member. The displacement position of the switching piece is set such that the distance from the free end of the switching piece in the displaced position to the upper end of the partition member is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. Thereby, in the second state where the switching piece is in the displaced position, the game ball B1 is prevented from entering the discharge passage through the gap between the switching piece and the partition member. In this configuration, while the switching piece is being switched from the initial position to the displaced position, an intermediate state occurs in which the distance from the free end of the switching piece to the upper end of the partition member is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B1. In the intermediate state, if the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage enters the gap between the rotating switching piece and the partition member, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 will become stuck between the switching piece and the partition member. There is.

The configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, the prize distribution device includes an escape passage adjacent to the discharge passage on the left side of the discharge passage. The entrance of the escape passage is provided at a position lower than the upper end of the partition member. The contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined backward toward the left, and the wall surface on the discharge passage side near the upper end of the partition member is inclined forward toward the left. That is, the two surfaces that come into contact with the game ball B1 in the intermediate state both have an inclination for pushing the game ball B1 toward the escape path. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 is pushed out into the escape path as the switching piece moves to the displaced state. This makes it possible to avoid the game ball B1 from being caught in the prize distribution device without causing the game ball B1 to rise or stay. The escape passage joins the discharge passage at a midway position of the discharge passage. In the intermediate state where the switching piece is switched, when the game ball B1 is pushed out toward the escape passage, the game ball B1 flows down the escape passage and is guided to a position in the middle of the discharge passage. The game ball B1 guided to the escape passage is not detected by the detection sensor provided in the V winning passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed out to the escape path in the intermediate state, the V winning does not occur, as in the case where the game ball B1 flows down the discharge path.

The configuration described in the third embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352, the blade member 343 rotates around the rotation axis 344 as the rotating body 340 rotates, and the blade A configuration can be applied in which the member 343 takes a displaced position to avoid pinching of the game ball B1. Specifically, the plate-shaped switching piece includes a fixed part on the fixed end side and a rotatable part on the free end side. A rotation shaft is provided on the free end side of the plate-shaped fixed part, and the plate-shaped rotatable part is connected to the fixed part in a manner that it can rotate around the rotation axis. When no external force is applied, the surface of the fixed part of the switching piece lies on the same plane as the surface of the rotatable part. The rotatable portion rotates downward when pushed downward from the outside, and returns to its original state due to the restoring force of the biasing member when the external force is removed. When the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the rotatable portion rotates downward as the switching piece moves to the displacement position. The restoring force by the biasing member is not strong enough to prevent the game ball B1 in contact with the partition member and the rotatable portion from falling downward due to its own weight. Therefore, the game ball B1, which is temporarily in contact with the partition member and the rotatable part, is not caught and stopped, but moves downward by its own weight and enters the discharge passage. In the switching piece in the displaced position, the length of the fixed portion protruding upward from the discharge path is such that the fixed portion alone can guide the game ball B1 to the V winning path. When the game ball B1 falling from above collides with the rotatable portion while the switching piece is in the displaced position, the rotatable portion rotates downward. However, in both the state in which the rotary movable part is not rotating and the state in which it is rotating, the distance from the free end of the rotatable movable part to the upper end of the partition member is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the switching piece is completely moved to the displacement position, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the free end of the rotatable part and the upper end of the partition plate and enter the discharge passage. . As described above, by configuring the switching piece to include a fixed part, a rotating shaft, and a rotatable part, and the rotatable part to be rotatable around the rotating shaft, the game ball B1 It becomes possible for the ball to enter the discharge passage without rising or stopping.

(4) In a game machine in which the second operating port 34 is opened when the game ball B1 entering the trigger generator is detected, the game ball B1 described in each of the above embodiments is used for the trigger generator. A configuration may be applied to prevent the rise and stagnation of the

Specifically, the game area PA is composed of an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 of the variable display unit 36. A first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, and a trigger generator and a special opening device are provided in the right area PA3.

In the right area PA3, the special opening device is arranged below the trigger generator. The trigger generation device includes a rotating body, a housing part that accommodates the rotating body, a trigger generating drive unit that rotates the rotating body based on a signal from the main CPU 63, and a trigger generation area in which the game ball is generated in the trigger generation area of the trigger generation device. A trigger occurrence detection sensor for detecting B1 is provided. The accommodating portion includes an upright wall for partitioning the accommodating space. In the upper part of the housing part, the left standing wall and the right standing wall are separated from each other, and the gap between the left standing wall and the right standing wall serves as an entrance to the trigger generator. The entrance of the trigger generator is an opening that opens upward, and the width of the entrance is set to be one size wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The game ball B1 can enter the opportunity generating device from the entrance. As the rotating body rotates, at the entrance of the trigger generation device, a state in which the game ball B1 can enter and a state in which the game ball B1 cannot enter occur. The special opening device includes a special opening that opens upward, an opening/closing member that can open and close the special opening, and a The apparatus includes a special drive section that opens or closes the special opening by driving the opening/closing member based on a signal.

The main CPU 63 executes a jackpot lottery when a prize is won through the first operating port 33. The right comes into existence when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot. In the right generation state, when the game ball B1 enters the opportunity generation device and the game ball B1 is detected by the opportunity generation detection sensor, the opening/closing period of the special opening device is started. Then, the game ball B1 is paid out when the ball enters the special opening that is in the open state. If a preset standard time elapses while the opening/closing operation of the special opening device is being performed, or if the number of balls entering the special opening reaches the standard number of times, the opening/closing operation of the special opening device The period ends. Among these, if a preset reference time elapses while the opening/closing operation of the special opening device is being performed, the second opening/closing operation is performed by the special opening device.

In this configuration, when a rotating body having one or more recesses capable of accommodating the game ball B1 is used as the rotating body of the trigger generating device, when the gaming ball B1 enters the trigger generating device, it stands upright with the rotating body. There is a possibility that it will get stuck between the wall and the wall. On the other hand, the configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration.

Specifically, on the surface of the game board, a passage entrance is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the trigger generator. Further, the game board is formed with an escape passageway that allows the game ball B1 that enters from the entrance of the passageway to escape backward and downward. The rotating body is disk-shaped, and the circumferential surface of the rotating body excluding the recessed portion is inclined rearward in the axial direction. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the recessed portion in the upper part of the trigger generator is guided to the passage entrance along the slope of the circumferential surface of the rotating body. In the upper part of the trigger generator, the contact surface of the upright wall with the game ball B1 is inclined to the right toward the rear. Further, the rotating body rotates clockwise. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is pressed against the standing wall from the rotating body at the upper part of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 is guided along the slope of the standing wall and escapes toward the rear passage entrance. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body and the upright wall at the upper part of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 enters the entrance of the passage as the rotating body rotates. In this way, by applying the configuration to avoid the game ball B1 from being caught in the upper part of the trigger generation device, when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generation device, the game ball B1 rises or stops. This has been avoided. Note that the trigger generation detection sensor is provided inside the trigger generation device, and can detect only the game ball B1 taken into the interior of the trigger generation device. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 enters the entrance of the passageway, the entry does not trigger the opening/closing operation of the special opening device.

The configuration described in the second embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates around the rotation axis 254 to take in the game ball B1. You can apply configurations that make it possible. Specifically, the upright wall includes a rotation axis and a movable upright wall that is rotatable around the rotation axis. The movable upright wall is located at the top of the trigger generator and defines the right end of the entrance to the trigger generator. The rotating body rotates clockwise. At the upper part of the trigger generation device, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 that is about to enter the trigger generation device is in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall. In this case, the game ball B1 will be pushed toward the right side where the movable upright wall is present as the rotating body rotates. By rotating around the rotation axis, the movable upright wall can release the force of the rotating body pressing the game ball B1 against the movable upright wall. Further, the contact surface of the movable upright wall with the game ball B1 is inclined downward to the right. Therefore, when the rotating body pushes the game ball B1 toward the contact surface, the movable upright wall rotates to the right, and the game ball B1 is guided by the slope of the contact surface with the rotary upright wall. and is taken into the trigger generation device. By avoiding the game ball B1 that is temporarily in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall from being caught, it is possible to avoid the game ball B1 from rising and stopping. In addition, if the game ball B1 taken into the trigger generation device is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor after temporarily coming into contact with the rotating body and the movable standing wall, the opening/closing operation of the special opening device is This is the opportunity to start.

(5) The adjustment mechanism (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) in each of the above embodiments has a dischargeable period in which the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 only for a certain period. It is not limited to configurations that occur in For example, the adjustment mechanism allows game balls to be held within the upper limit number (4) of numerical information that can be held in the general power holding area HA (Fig. A configuration may be adopted in which B1 is discharged toward the first through gate 35.

In the first embodiment, in addition to the four recesses 183b to 183e (FIG. 4) arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, an additional fifth recess may be provided in the rotating body 183. good. The fifth recess has the same shape and size as the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d, and can take in one game ball B1. In this case, the game ball B1 ejected from any of the four recesses 183b to 183e enters the first through gate 35 at a 1-sec cycle, and is taken into the fifth recess and ejected at a 1-sec cycle. The game ball B1 that was ejected at a timing other than the possible period enters the ball.

In the fifth embodiment, the adjustment section 546 (FIG. 55) may be configured to open at a cycle of 0.5 seconds. If the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 during the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the general electricity release winning will occur in the general electricity release lottery once every two times. be able to. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the open state of the adjustment section 546 (FIG. 55) that occurs every second may continue for 0.5 seconds, which is longer than in the fifth embodiment. In this case, a plurality of game balls B1 can be ejected toward the first through gate 35 in one open state. Here, the shortest firing interval in the game ball firing mechanism 27 is 0.6 seconds. For this reason, in one open state, the number of game balls B1 that are ejected at a timing outside the original ejection period and enter the first through gate 35 is set as the upper limit of the numerical information that the general electric power holding area HA can hold. It can be kept within a range that does not exceed the number of items.

The game ball B1 is configured to enter the first through gate 35 even at timings other than the ejection possible period that occurs every 1 sec, within a range where the general electricity holding area HA does not exceed the upper limit number of numerical information that can be held. As a result, even during the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a single non-consecutive general power release win. Therefore, even if the non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode continues for a long time, the player's expectations for the continuous winning period are increased every time a power grid opening winning occurs, so that the player does not get bored. can do.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history). However, it is not limited to this, and only some of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are subject to storage of history information. It may be configured as follows. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storing history information, or a configuration in which only the general winning opening 31 is subject to storing historical information may be adopted. Good too. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball during a predetermined period with respect to the ball entry part for which the history information is stored.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118c are set for the purpose of Even if there is a plurality of ball entry detection sensors and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors exist, the structure may be such that the information is transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to suppress the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(8) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the correspondence information is stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence relationship information, so it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(9) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although the configuration is such that this is performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate bidirectionally, and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate with the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a nonvolatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is transferred to the main CPU 63. The configuration is such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the information is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(10) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118g are used to transmit information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information is mainly used. A configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information it is receiving from the main CPU 63 based on the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(11) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but this is not limiting. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on history information are transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means in the same way as in the seventeenth embodiment so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters are performed. , the main CPU 63 sends commands corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the audio light emission control device 81, thereby controlling the contents of the various parameters using the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41. A configuration may also be adopted in which a corresponding notification is executed.

(12) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and The content of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, the symbol display device 41, etc. In this case, when the gaming hall starts business, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry state of game balls in the gaming area PA on the previous business day was normal.

(13) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the game cannot be started on the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition release operation is performed. You can also use it as As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is prohibited, a configuration in which each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and a configuration in which the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the win/fail determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be performed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erase switch is turned ON, and can be performed when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It is also possible to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(14) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculations of various parameters using the history information are performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. It is also possible to have a configuration in which neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameter calculations may be performed using the read history information by the reading worker. Often, the reading device may be configured to calculate various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112.

(15) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have the functions of storing history information and calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side The configuration may be included in the CPU 92 or the audio emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is equipped with these functions, information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control entity equipped with the function. That will happen.

(16) The management IC 66 is equipped with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, so even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is possible to output history information or various parameters. This allows the reading device to read history information and various parameters even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(17) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with the reading device, it is not limited to this. Instead, a terminal used for reading historical information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminals used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a location other than the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(18) The correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 631 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to a configuration in which they are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory; for example, these memories Any of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main side RAM 65. Good too.

(19) It is not limited to a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and history information is not stored and the game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. A configuration may be adopted in which various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters becomes high, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any timing.

(20) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and executes storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. , a configuration may be adopted in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and also outputs history information to the outside.

(21) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as historical information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening/closing execution mode may be stored as historical information. Often, the timing of transition to opening/closing execution mode and the timing of termination may be stored as historical information, or the occurrence of transition to high-frequency support mode may be stored as historical information. It may be configured such that the occurrence of the event is stored as history information. Alternatively, the probability of transitioning to opening/closing execution mode may be calculated by using the above-mentioned history information, or the probability of transitioning to high-frequency support mode may be calculated, and the probability of transitioning to high-frequency support mode may be calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. A configuration may also be adopted in which the history information and various parameters can be read by a reading device.

(22) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, It may be configured such that history information including RTC information is stored regarding the entry of a ball into a bonus opportunity ball entry section such as the second operation port 34, which is a trigger for the payout of game balls and the award/failure determination process. As a result, while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the bonus opportunity ball entry section, it is also possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each bonus opportunity ball entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(24) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as items to be saved as history information. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is in a full state, the timing at which the full state is started, and the timing at which the full state is canceled is stored as history information. It may be configured such that at least one of the fact that there is no ball state, the timing at which the no ball state is started, and the timing at which the no ball state is canceled is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. In particular, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(25) In the first embodiment and the like, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, there is no need to previously set in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(26) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entry section that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls is grasped using the history information. The configuration may be such that the information is externally output to the reading device. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry section in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it becomes possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entry section that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In such cases, an abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is opened illegally and game balls are entered into a predetermined ball entry section.

(27) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(28) In the first embodiment, etc., the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the checking process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the first embodiment, etc. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of changing the output state of each signal matches the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each of the buffers 122a to 122o.

(29) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is output externally using the reading terminal 102, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the program and data can be selectively output externally, and a predetermined program A configuration may also be adopted in which only the data can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. Note that, as a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. is possible.

(30) Other information to be output externally through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information or various parameters, and for example, when an abnormality occurs. may be configured to store history information of the abnormality occurrence, and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

(31) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the configuration is such that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by summing the number of game balls detected, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is not limited to this, and for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA are determined. A configuration may be adopted in which a passage area through which game balls pass one by one is provided, and a discharge detection sensor is provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA. In addition, in this configuration, similarly to each of the above embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls that have been ejected from the game area PA.

(32) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio emission control device 81 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 82 controls the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(33) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, when a game is started based on the operation of a start lever, the results of the lottery processing of the winning combinations executed are recorded as history information. The history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each role, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history information is stored as history information. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using the information, or the ratio of the number of games staying in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may make notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

(34) The characteristic configurations of the first to eighteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment may be combined; The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined. Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the other embodiments described above may be applied in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. a ball entrance part (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of step S705 and step S706 in the main CPU 63) for granting a benefit with at least one condition that a game ball enters the ball entering section;
Equipped with
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the benefit is more likely to be granted than in the first mode are set as control modes for the granting status of the benefit. ,
Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry section;
In the first mode, each guiding timing of the game ball guided by the guiding means corresponds to or corresponds to the grant timing at which the game ball guided to the ball entry section triggers the granting of the benefit. A predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S312 and step S313 in the main CPU 63) that generates a predetermined situation (continuous winning period) that makes it easier to win.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the first mode is configured to be less likely to be in a privilege granting situation compared to the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's expectations regarding the awarding of benefits are low. In this configuration, as a situation that occurs in the first mode, a predetermined situation is provided in which the guiding timing of the game ball guided by the guiding means corresponds to or easily corresponds to the provision trigger timing. Thereby, it is possible to make the player who is performing the shooting operation of the game ball in the first mode feel a sense of expectation that the predetermined situation may occur. In the first mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's expectations regarding the awarding of benefits.

Feature A2. a ball entrance part (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of step S705 and step S706 in the main CPU 63) for granting a benefit with at least one condition that a game ball enters the ball entering section;
Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry section;
Each guidance timing of a game ball guided by the guiding means at a predetermined time interval to the ball entry section is a grant trigger timing at which the game ball guided to the ball entry section triggers the award of the benefit. A predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S312 and step S313 in the main CPU 63) that generates a predetermined situation (continuous winning period) that makes it easier to deal with or to deal with.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A2, all or part of the conditions for awarding the benefit are satisfied when the guidance timing corresponds to the awarding trigger timing or a predetermined situation in which it becomes easy to respond. The predetermined situation is a situation in which there is a possibility of awarding a benefit every time the guidance timing comes, and is an advantageous situation for the player. By configuring the game so that the predetermined situation occurs, it is possible to make the player aware of the occurrence of the predetermined situation even when the predetermined situation is not present, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation to occur by changing the grant trigger timing.

According to feature A3, when the granting trigger timing is changed and the guidance timing corresponds to the granting trigger timing, or when the situation becomes such that it becomes easier to respond, a predetermined situation occurs and the granting trigger timing is changed. The predetermined situation ends when the guidance timing does not correspond to the provision trigger timing. By assuming that the predetermined situation occurs without any warning signs, the player can be made aware of the predetermined situation at all times. By always keeping the player's expectations high regarding the occurrence of a predetermined situation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. a first updating means for updating and storing numerical information (a function for executing the process of step S202 in the general utility utility release counter C4 and the main CPU 63);
A second updating means for updating and storing numerical information for updating the initial value of the first updating means (initial value counter for opening C5, a function of executing the process of step S113 in the main CPU 63, a function in the main CPU 63) function to execute the process of step S204);
Equipped with
The benefit granting means is
Based on the determination criterion information (low-frequency winning determination value table T1) in which numerical information corresponding to the grant trigger timing is set, the numerical information stored in the first updating means is used to carry out a predetermined process (general electricity (a function of executing the process of step S705 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S717 in the main side CPU 63);
In the predetermined process, means ( A function of executing the processing of steps S410 and S411 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S803 to S807 in the main CPU 63),
It is equipped with
The game according to feature A3, wherein the predetermined situation generating means generates the predetermined situation by setting numerical information stored in the second updating means as an initial value of the first updating means. Machine.

According to feature A4, by setting the numerical information stored in the second updating means as the initial value of the first updating means, the timing at which the predetermined situation occurs can be made irregular. By making the predetermined situation unpredictable when it will occur, it is possible to make the player always aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's expectations high regarding the occurrence of a predetermined situation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A5. The predetermined situation generating means includes:
A means for causing the predetermined situation by executing a predetermined change process that changes the temporal relationship between the guidance timing and the provision trigger timing every time a predetermined change timing is reached (step S312 in the main CPU 63) and a function of executing the process of step S313);
Extending means for extending the predetermined situation by postponing the execution of the predetermined change process when the change timing comes in the predetermined situation (a function of executing step S305 in the main CPU 63, a step in the main CPU 63) function to execute the process of S712),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A5, by postponing the execution of the predetermined change process, the predetermined situation that is advantageous to the player continues for a long time, and the predetermined situation can be made attractive. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined situation and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A6. a starting ball entrance part (first operating port 33, 581, second operating port 34, 582) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
means (a function of executing the process of step S215 in the main CPU 63) for creating a state advantageous for the player using at least one condition that a game ball enters the starting ball entry section;
Equipped with
The starting ball entering section is configured to move the starting ball entering section between a first predetermined state (a closed state of the general electric accessory 34a) in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the ball, and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball into the starting ball entry section. The game ball is also equipped with an acceptance control means (a function of executing general-purpose electric power control processing in the main CPU 63) that can be switched to a second predetermined state (an open state of the general electric power accessory 34a) in which a game ball can easily enter the ball. ,
The control modes of the starting ball entry section by the acceptance control means include a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the second predetermined state is more likely to be reached than the first mode. , is set,
The benefit granting means executes a predetermined determination (a general electricity lottery) with at least one condition being that a game ball enters the ball entry section, and determines in the predetermined judgment a predetermined determination result (a general electricity release lottery). In this case, the bonus is a means for bringing the starting ball entry section into the second predetermined state (a function of executing the processing of steps S407 to S411 in the main CPU 63),
Any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation to occur on one condition that the control mode of the starting ball entering section is the first mode. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A6, in the first mode, the starting ball entrance part is less likely to be in the second predetermined state than in the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's expectations for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section are lower than in the second mode. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the starting ball entry area in the first mode. . Since the predetermined situation occurs on the condition that the first mode is used, the impression that the first mode is disadvantageous compared to the second mode can be alleviated.

Feature A7. The probability of occurrence of the predetermined situation is higher when the control mode of the acceptance control means is the second mode than in the first mode, which includes both the predetermined situation and the case where it is not the predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that the probability is set to be more advantageous to the player than in the case of .

According to feature A7, when comparing the second mode with the entire first mode including both the predetermined situation and the non-predetermined situation, the second mode is the first mode. This is more advantageous for the player than the case. While maintaining the premise that the second mode is more advantageous for the player than the first mode, by causing a predetermined situation in the first mode, the game ball starts in the first mode. It is possible to prevent a player's expectation of entering a ball into a ball entry section from being significantly lowered.

Feature A8. comprising a firing means (gaming ball firing mechanism 27) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player;
In the game area, as the ball entry part, a first ball entry part (first through ball entry part) that exists at a position where a ball entry may occur when the player performs a firing operation of the firing means in the first firing mode. gate 35), and a second ball entrance part (second ball entrance part) located at a position where a ball can enter when the player performs a firing operation of the firing means in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode. A through gate 39) is provided,
The guiding means guides the game ball toward the first ball entry section,
When the control mode in the acceptance control means is the first mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the firing operation in the first firing mode than to perform the firing operation in the second firing mode, In the case of the second mode, performing the firing operation in the second firing mode is more advantageous for the player than performing the firing operation in the first firing mode, as described in feature A7. gaming machines.

According to feature A8, when there is one ball entry section, even when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode, the game ball is guided by the guiding means to enter the ball entry section. The need arises. Therefore, game balls that are not guided by the guiding means cannot enter the ball entry section. On the other hand, by providing a second ball entry section that is different from the first ball entry section in which the guiding means is provided, in the second mode, the game ball can be sent to the first ball entry section without passing through the guiding means. It is possible to have the ball enter the 2-ball entry section. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined determination is performed in the second mode.

In addition, by creating a configuration that is advantageous for the player by changing the firing mode depending on the situation, compared to a configuration that continues the same firing mode, it increases the player's sense of participation and improves the interest in the game. can be achieved.

Feature A9. If the predetermined determination result is the predetermined determination result when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode, the benefit granting means determines the predetermined determination result when the control mode is the first mode. Any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that the starting ball entering section is brought into the second predetermined state in a manner in which the game ball enters the starting ball entering section more easily than when the predetermined determination result is obtained. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature A9, if a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, which is originally more disadvantageous for the player than in the second mode, a predetermined judgment result is determined in a predetermined judgment every time a game ball enters the ball entry section. Become. Therefore, in the first mode and in the predetermined situation, there is a possibility that the starting ball entry section will be in the second predetermined state more frequently than in the second mode. In contrast, when the predetermined determination result in the second mode is determined, the starting ball enters the second predetermined state, and when the predetermined determination result in the first mode is the predetermined determination result. This is a configuration in which the game ball is more likely to enter the starting ball entering portion than in a mode in which the starting ball entering portion is in the second predetermined situation. As a result, the frequency with which a game ball enters the starting ball part when in the second mode, and the frequency with which a game ball enters the starting ball part when in the first mode and under a predetermined situation. Balance can be achieved.

Feature A10. The guiding means is
A guiding portion (near the intake port 185, the vicinity of the intake port 262, the upper part of the adjustment mechanisms 330, 430, and the vicinity of the adjustment portion 546) that can be reached by the game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Means for guiding a game ball that has arrived at the guiding section toward the ball loading section at a guidance-enabled timing (timing when the fetching permission state is enabled) at which the guiding means can guide the game ball toward the ball loading section. (rotating bodies 183, 230, 340, 440),
ejecting means (periphery surfaces 188a to 191a of blade parts 188 to 191) for ejecting game balls that have arrived at the guide part at a timing different from the guideable timing to an area different from the ball entry part;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A10, since the game balls that have arrived at the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing can be ejected, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have not been taken into the guide means from staying near the guide section. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the vicinity of the guiding part in a state where the game ball that has arrived at the guiding part at the guidance-enabled timing is easily guided toward the ball entry part.

Feature A11. The ejecting means includes means (periphery surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade parts 188 to 191) for ejecting game balls that have arrived at the guiding section at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guiding means. The gaming machine according to feature A10.

According to feature A11, by discharging game balls that have arrived at the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guide means at the guide section, it is possible to suppress the game balls from staying near the guide section. be able to. Thereby, in the guiding section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guiding of the game ball, which is the guiding target, to the ball entry section will be hindered by the game ball, which is not the guiding target.

Feature A12. The ejection means is
A space in which a game ball can flow down, which is a downstream space provided around the guiding means in the gaming area (a space provided on the left and right sides of the adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, 620, adjustment mechanisms). space provided to the left of 220),
The game ball is provided in the game area with an interval between the guide means and the guide unit so that the game ball guided by the guide part can flow down into the downstream space at a timing different from the guideable timing. , ball guide means (nail 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide part;
The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A12, by configuring the game ball that is guided by the guiding part and not taken into the guiding means to flow downstream through the downstream space, the possibility that the game ball stays near the guiding part is reduced. can do. Furthermore, since the ball guiding means can guide the game balls to the guiding section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guiding means will run out of game balls to guide toward the ball entry section.

Feature A13. Any of features A10 to A12, characterized in that the ejecting means is provided with an auxiliary passageway (escape passageway 172) into which a game ball that has arrived at the guiding part at a timing different from the guidance-enabled timing can enter. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature A13, by having a configuration in which a game ball that has arrived at the guiding part at a timing different from the guidance possible timing is moved to another place by the auxiliary passage, the game ball can reach the guiding part and move to another place. It is possible to avoid the game balls that have reached the guiding part from staying around the guiding part while avoiding collision of the game balls that are being played with other game balls that are flowing down the gaming area.

Feature A14. The rear boundary of the gaming area is defined by a plate-shaped area defining means (gaming board 24, 610),
The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the auxiliary passageway allows the game ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

According to feature A14, the member partitions the auxiliary passage by having a configuration in which game balls that arrive at the guide part at a timing different from the guideable timing are ejected toward the rear than the front surface of the area defining means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game ball.

Feature A15. According to feature A14, the auxiliary passage is provided with a passage outlet (passage exit 173) that discharges game balls flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the gaming area in front of the area defining means. gaming machines.

According to feature A15, in a configuration in which game balls that enter the auxiliary passage do not return to the game area, there is a possibility that there will be a shortage of game balls flowing downstream of the guiding means. On the other hand, by configuring the game balls flowing down the auxiliary passageway to return to the gaming area from the passage exit, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls flowing down the downstream side of the guiding means will decrease.

Feature A16. In the gaming area, a device is provided to prevent game balls flowing down the gaming area from upstream of the passageway exit from colliding with game balls discharged toward the gaming area from the passageway exit. The gaming machine according to feature A15, characterized in that a collision preventing means (exit roof 174) is provided for preventing collision.

According to feature A16, a game ball that attempts to return to the gaming area from the passageway exit collides with a game ball that has flowed down from upstream of the passageway exit in the gaming area, and is returned to the auxiliary passageway again. can be prevented.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein the movement of the game ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to feature A17, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid being unable to visually follow the movement of the game ball as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in a configuration in which the game ball returns to the gaming area after passing through the auxiliary passage, the player can continuously monitor the movement of the game ball so that the ball disappears once it enters the auxiliary passage. It is possible to create a configuration that does not cause a sense of discomfort caused by the game ball suddenly returning to the game area.

Feature A18. The guiding means is
Entry prevention means (left standing walls 181c, 181h, right standing wall 181d, upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that prevents game balls flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means. , standing wall 352),
A rotating means (rotating body) that is rotatable and includes a taking means (recesses 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and blade members 343) that can take and hold a game ball into the guiding means. 183,230,340,440) and
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive section 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
It is equipped with
The entry prevention means is provided with an intake opening (intake port 185) as an opening through which the game ball that has reached the guide part can be taken into the inside of the guide means,
The ejection means ejects the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. This means that the game ball is provided with avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right side standing wall 181d) to avoid the game ball from being caught. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A17.

According to feature A18, by discharging the game ball that is in contact with the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage, It is possible to avoid the game ball from being caught and stuck. Furthermore, by avoiding the game balls from getting caught, it is possible to reduce the burden of maintenance that must be performed by the game hall manager.

Feature A19. The avoidance means prevents the auxiliary passage from rotating when the rotation means rotates with respect to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening. The gaming machine according to feature A18, characterized in that a force directed toward the entrance is applied.

According to feature A19, by rotating the rotating means, the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening is eliminated. For this reason, there is no need for a special structure for avoiding the game balls from being caught. Thereby, it is possible to avoid complicating the configuration and reduce manufacturing costs, and it is also possible to avoid increasing the size of the guiding means and to ensure flexibility in the arrangement of the guiding means.

Feature A20. The avoidance means is means for applying a force including a downward component to the game ball when the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means (front surface 188b). 191b).

According to feature A20, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls that are in contact with both the rotating means and the entry prevention means are thrown upward and the flow of upstream game balls is disturbed.

Feature A21. The ejection means includes a passage entrance (passage entrance 171) as an opening that allows the game ball to enter the auxiliary passage;
The taking-in means includes means (slanting inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the game balls taken into the guiding means by the taking-in means from moving toward the passage entrance. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20.

According to feature A21, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken into the taking-in means is guided and enters the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the ball entry part. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the ball entry section by the guiding means.

Feature A22. The guiding means is
an intake opening (intake port 262) that allows the game balls flowing down toward the guiding means to enter the inside of the guiding means;
an opening partition means (upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) partitioning the intake opening;
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340) that is rotatable and includes a conveying means (step surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) for conveying the game balls taken into the guiding means inside the guiding means. )and,
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive section 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
The game ball is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the intake opening, the game ball deforms and A deformation means (upper right standing wall 252, blade member 343, rotation shafts 254, 344) that makes it possible to release the force that tries to pinch the
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A22, by deforming the taking-in permission means around the taking-in opening, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught between the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and stopped.

Feature A23. The deforming means includes means (upper right standing wall 252, rotation shaft 254) that makes it possible to release the force applied to the opening dividing means by temporarily displacing the opening dividing means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature A22.

According to feature A23, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening dividing means and the game ball is pushed toward the opening dividing means as the rotating means rotates, the opening By temporarily displacing the partitioning means to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught and stopped.

Feature A24. The deformation means includes means (blade member 343, rotation shaft 344) that makes it possible to release the force applied to the rotation means by temporarily displacing a part of the rotation means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to feature A22 or A23.

According to feature A24, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening dividing means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening dividing means as the rotating means rotates. In addition, by temporarily displacing a part of the rotating means to a specific position and releasing the force that pinches the game ball, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught and stopped.

Feature A25. The guiding means is
A rotating means (rotating body) that is rotatable and includes a taking means (recesses 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and blade members 343) that can take and hold a game ball into the guiding means. 183,230,340,440) and
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive section 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
Ejection for ejecting the game ball being conveyed by the taking-in means toward the ball entry section at a timing before the timing when the vertical movement direction of the taking-in means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction. means (exhaust ports 256, 621);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A25, in the case of a configuration in which the game balls being conveyed by the taking means are released at the timing when the vertical movement direction of the taking means switches from downward to upward, the game balls in the releasing means are discharged. If the release timing is delayed, there is a possibility that the game balls being conveyed by the taking-in means will begin to rise within the guiding means. On the other hand, by configuring the system to release the game balls being conveyed by the capturing means at a timing before the timing when the vertical movement direction of the capturing means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game ball can be released. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will rise within the guiding means when the timing of releasing the ball is delayed.

Feature A26. The guiding means prevents the game balls that are taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guiding means by rotation of the rotating means. Equipped with fall prevention means (left side standing wall 181h, right side standing wall 181d),
The release means includes a release opening (discharge port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the game ball being conveyed while being in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guide means. 621) The gaming machine according to feature A25.

According to feature A26, the game ball is transported in a state in contact with the fall prevention means, and when it reaches the release opening, it is released toward the outside of the guiding means. Since the position of the discharge opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same every time. Further, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature A27. The game machine according to feature A26, wherein the discharge opening is configured such that, at an edge of the discharge opening, the discharge direction of the game ball discharged from the discharge opening is directed toward the ball entry portion.

According to feature A27, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it comes into contact with the edge of the release opening and is thereby released toward the ball entry portion. By fixing the position where the game ball is released from the guide means and the direction in which it is released, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guide means will reach the ball entry part.

Feature A28. The ejection means includes a direction changing means (ejection protrusion 181e, The gaming machine according to any one of features A25 to A27, characterized in that it is provided with a discharge protruding end 263a).

According to feature A28, the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction in which the game ball is released, so that the game ball can change the release position without being released from the release means. You can prevent them from passing by. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have not been released at the release position from rising within the guide means.

Feature A29. The direction changing means protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the gaming area in a manner that it can come into contact with the game ball guided by the rotating means,
The gaming machine according to feature A28, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoidance means (collision avoidance groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to feature A29, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without interfering with the rotation of the rotating means, the moving direction of the game ball is changed at the release position and the release of the game ball is promoted. be able to.

Feature A30. Feature A28 or The gaming machine described in A29.

According to feature A30, by directing the release direction of the game ball toward the ball entry part at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means will reach the ball entry part at the release position. .

Feature A31. The guiding means is
Direction regulating means (guide passage 545) for regulating the direction in which the game ball is released toward the ball entry section;
The direction determining means is located upstream of the direction in which the game ball flows down the direction determining means, and is in an open state to allow a game ball to enter the direction determining means, and is in a closed state. An opening/closing means (adjusting unit 546) that makes it impossible for game balls to enter the ball;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A31, by making the structure of the guiding means simple, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of options for arranging the guide means in the game area, and to increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature A32. The guiding means releases the game ball toward the ball entry section,
At a position on the way where the game ball discharged from the guide means heads toward the ball entry section, a course adjustment means is provided that allows or disallows the game ball to flow down toward the ball entry section. (Electric nail 560) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A31.

According to feature A32, a part of the game ball discharged from the guiding means toward the ball entry part comes off from the ball entry part. By setting whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means will enter the ball entry section as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the players' concerns. , it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A33. The course adjustment means is
A change execution means (electric nail 560) that changes the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the guide means comes into contact with the change execution means; and changing the game ball so that the game ball released from the guide means does not come into contact with the change execution means. a course adjustment drive means (nail drive section 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to feature A33, the volume occupied by the path adjustment means can be reduced by having a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the ball entry section and a state in which it cannot flow down toward the ball entry section by moving the change execution means. It is possible to suppress this and increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature A34. The guiding means is
means for ejecting the game balls so that the ejected game balls come into contact with the path adjustment means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243);
means (fourth support surface 244) for ejecting the game balls so that the ejected game balls do not come into contact with the path adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to feature A32 or A33, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A34, by configuring the guiding means to emit game balls in a plurality of ways, some game balls are ejected from the guiding means and enter the ball entry section, and others do not enter the ball entry section. be able to. In addition, in the guiding means, by setting the rate of occurrence of the discharge mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjustment means and the release mode in which the released game ball does not come into contact with the path adjustment means to occur, the game ball released from the guide means enters the ball. It is possible to make the percentage of balls that enter the zone and the percentage of balls that do not enter the zone close to the percentage set at the design stage.

Feature A35. The guiding means releases the game ball toward the ball entry section,
Any of features A1 to A34, characterized in that the ball entry part is provided in the game area at a position that is more than a diameter of the game ball from a position where the guiding means starts releasing the game ball. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature A35, the game ball can pass between the position where the guiding means starts releasing the game ball and the ball entry section. For this reason, there remains a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means may not enter the ball entry section. By setting whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means will enter the ball entry section as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the players' concerns. , it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A36. The guiding means causes the game ball to reach the ball entry part by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The ball entry section is characterized by having an opening slanted substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball discharged from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A35.

According to feature A36, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that is released from the guiding means and reaches the ball entry portion will enter the ball entry portion without contacting the edge of the ball entry portion. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball ejected from the guiding means collides with the edge of the ball entry part, causing the ball entry timing to shift or coming off the ball entry part.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A36, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to feature group A above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held using numerical information when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the lottery.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a gaming area, numerical information is acquired from an updating means that updates numerical information for lottery, and the acquired numerical information is A determination is made as to whether the information corresponds to the winning information. Further, a configuration is also known in which numerical information is acquired based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a specific performance or notification is performed based on the result of a lottery performed using the numerical information.

Here, innovative game contents are required for gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. Game balls that have reached the guidance section (near the intake port 185, vicinity of the intake port 262, the upper part of the adjustment mechanisms 330, 430, and the vicinity of the adjustment section 546) at the guidance possible timing (timing when the intake is permitted) are moved to a predetermined area ( A guiding means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) that can be guided toward the first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581);
ejecting means (periphery surfaces 188a to 191a of blade parts 188 to 191) for ejecting game balls that have reached the guiding part at a timing different from the guideable timing to an area different from the predetermined area;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, by discharging the game balls that have arrived at the guide part at a timing different from the guideable timing, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have not been guided from staying near the guide part. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the vicinity of the guiding part in a state where the game ball that has arrived at the guiding part at the guidance-enabled timing is easily guided.

Feature B2. The ejecting means includes means (periphery surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade parts 188 to 191) for ejecting game balls that have arrived at the guiding section at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guiding means. The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to feature B2, by discharging game balls that have arrived at the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guide means at the guide section, it is possible to suppress the game balls from staying near the guide section. be able to. Thereby, in the guiding section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guiding of the game ball to be guided to the predetermined area is obstructed by the game ball that is not to be guided.

Feature B3. The ejection means is
It is a space in which a game ball can flow down, and is provided around the guiding means in the game area (game area PA). a space provided on the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220);
The game ball is provided in the game area with an interval between the guide means and the guide unit so that the game ball guided by the guide part can flow down into the downstream space at a timing different from the guideable timing. , ball guide means (nail 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide part;
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B3, by configuring the game ball that has been guided by the guiding part and not taken in by the guiding means to flow downstream through the downstream space, the possibility that the game ball stays near the guiding part is reduced. can do. Furthermore, since the ball guiding means can guide the game balls to the guiding section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guiding means will run out of game balls to guide toward the predetermined area.

Feature B4. Any of the features B1 to B3, characterized in that the ejecting means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a game ball that has arrived at the guiding part at a timing different from the guidance possible timing can enter. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature B4, by having a configuration in which a game ball that has arrived at the guiding part at a timing different from the guiding possible timing is moved to another place by the auxiliary passage, the game ball can reach the guiding part and move to another place. It is possible to avoid the game balls that have reached the guiding part from staying around the guiding part while avoiding collision of the game balls that are being played with other game balls that are flowing down the gaming area.

Feature B5. The rear boundary of the gaming area (gaming area PA) is defined by a plate-shaped area defining means (gaming board 24, 610),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the auxiliary passage allows the game ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

According to feature B5, the member partitions the auxiliary passage by having a configuration in which game balls that arrive at the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing are discharged toward the rear than the front surface of the area defining means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game ball.

Feature B6. According to feature B5, the auxiliary passage includes a passage outlet (passage exit 173) that discharges game balls flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the gaming area in front of the area defining means. gaming machines.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which game balls that enter the auxiliary passage do not return to the game area, there is a possibility that there will be a shortage of game balls flowing downstream of the guide means. On the other hand, by configuring the game balls flowing down the auxiliary passageway to return to the gaming area from the passage exit, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls flowing down the downstream side of the guiding means will decrease.

Feature B7. In the gaming area, a device is provided to prevent game balls flowing down the gaming area from upstream of the passageway exit from colliding with game balls discharged toward the gaming area from the passageway exit. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) is provided for preventing collision.

According to feature B7, a game ball attempting to return to the gaming area from the passageway exit collides with a game ball flowing down from upstream of the passageway exit in the gaming area, and is returned to the auxiliary passageway again. can be prevented.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the movement of the game ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to feature B8, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid being unable to visually follow the movement of the game ball as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in a configuration in which the game ball returns to the gaming area after passing through the auxiliary passage, the player can continuously monitor the movement of the game ball so that the ball disappears once it enters the auxiliary passage. It is possible to create a configuration that does not cause a sense of discomfort caused by the game ball suddenly returning to the game area.

Feature B9. The guiding means is
Entry prevention means (left standing walls 181c, 181h, right standing wall 181d, upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that prevents game balls flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means. , standing wall 352),
A rotating means (rotating body) that is rotatable and includes a taking means (recesses 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and blade members 343) that can take and hold a game ball into the guiding means. 183,230,340,440) and
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive section 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
It is equipped with
The entry prevention means is provided with an intake opening (intake port 185) as an opening through which the game ball that has reached the guide part can be taken into the inside of the guide means,
The ejecting means discharges the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening to an area different from the predetermined area. Feature B1 characterized in that it includes an avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right side upright wall 181d) for avoiding being caught. The gaming machine according to any one of B8 to B8.

According to feature B9, by discharging the game ball that is in contact with the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening to an area different from the predetermined area, the game ball is prevented from being caught. It is possible to avoid being stuck in the parking lot. Furthermore, by avoiding the game balls from getting caught, it is possible to reduce the burden of maintenance that must be performed by the game hall manager.

Feature B10. The avoidance means is configured to prevent the game ball from contacting the predetermined area and the predetermined area when the rotation means rotates with respect to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the gaming machine applies a force directed toward a different area.

According to feature B10, the rotation of the rotating means eliminates the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening. For this reason, there is no need for a special structure for avoiding the game balls from being caught. Thereby, it is possible to avoid complicating the configuration and reduce manufacturing costs, and it is also possible to avoid increasing the size of the guiding means and to ensure flexibility in the arrangement of the guiding means.

Feature B11. The avoidance means is means for applying a force including a downward component to the game ball when the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means (front surface 188b). 191b).

According to feature B11, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls that are in contact with both the rotating means and the entry prevention means are thrown upward and the flow of upstream game balls is disturbed.

Feature B12. The ejection means is
an auxiliary passageway (escape passageway 172) into which a game ball that has arrived at the guidance section at a timing different from the guidance-enabled timing can enter;
a passage entrance (passage entrance 171) that is an opening that allows a game ball to enter the auxiliary passage;
It is equipped with
The taking-in means includes means for preventing the game balls taken into the guiding means by the taking-in means from moving toward the passage entrance (slanting inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e). The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11.

According to feature B12, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken into the taking-in means will enter the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before being guided and reaching the predetermined area. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the predetermined area by the guiding means.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B12, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group B, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area where game balls flow down, and the game board includes nails and windmills to appropriately disperse the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special winning winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls fired from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while coming into contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, actuation opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are fired. Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Equipped with a guiding means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581),
The guiding means is
A rotating means (rotating body) that is rotatable and includes a taking means (recesses 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and blade members 343) that can take and hold a game ball into the guiding means. 183,230,340,440) and
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive section 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
A discharge means for discharging the game balls being conveyed by the taking means toward the predetermined area at a timing before the timing when the vertical movement direction of the taking means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction. (exhaust ports 256, 621),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, in the case of a configuration in which the game balls being conveyed by the taking means are released at the timing when the vertical movement direction of the taking means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game balls in the releasing means are discharged. If the release timing is delayed, there is a possibility that the game balls being conveyed by the taking-in means will begin to rise within the guiding means. On the other hand, by configuring the system to release the game balls being conveyed by the capturing means at a timing before the timing when the vertical movement direction of the capturing means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game ball can be released. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will rise within the guiding means when the timing of releasing the ball is delayed.

Feature C2. The guiding means prevents the game balls that are taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guiding means by rotation of the rotating means. Equipped with fall prevention means (left side standing wall 181h, right side standing wall 181d),
The release means includes a release opening (discharge port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the game ball being conveyed while being in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guide means. 621) The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to feature C2, the game ball is transported in a state in contact with the fall prevention means, and when it reaches the release opening, it is released toward the outside of the guiding means. Since the position of the discharge opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same every time. Further, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature C3. The game machine according to feature C2, wherein the discharge opening has a direction in which the game balls discharged from the discharge opening are directed toward the predetermined area at an edge of the discharge opening.

According to feature C3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it is released toward the predetermined area by contacting the edge of the release opening. By fixing the position and the direction in which the game balls are released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game balls released from the guiding means will reach the predetermined area.

Feature C4. The predetermined area is provided with a ball entrance part (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter,
comprising a benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of step S705 and step S706 in the main CPU 63) for granting a benefit on at least one condition that a game ball enters the ball entry section;
Feature C3 is characterized in that the ejection direction is a direction that allows the game ball ejected from the ejection opening to enter the ball entry portion without colliding with the edge of the ball entry portion. The game machine described.

According to feature C4, the game ball released from the release opening collides with the edge of the ball entry part, causing a lag in the timing of the game ball entering the ball entry part, or causing the game ball to move away from the ball entry part. This can reduce the possibility of it coming off.

Feature C5. The ejecting means includes a direction changing means (ejecting protrusion 181e, ejecting protrusion 181e, ejecting protrusion 181e, etc.) that changes the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the ejecting position to the ejecting direction at the ejecting position where the guiding means ejects the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising a projecting end 263a).

According to feature C5, the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction in which the game ball is released, so that the game ball can change the release position without being released from the release means. You can prevent them from passing by. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have not been released at the release position from rising within the guide means.

Feature C6. The direction changing means protrudes to an intermediate position in the front and back direction of the game area (game area PA) in a manner that it can come into contact with the game ball guided by the rotating means,
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoidance means (collision avoidance groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to feature C6, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without interfering with the rotation of the rotating means, the moving direction of the game ball is changed at the release position and the release of the game ball is promoted. be able to.

Feature C7. Feature C5 or C6, characterized in that the direction changing means is provided with means (discharge right side surface 181g) for guiding the game ball that has come into contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the predetermined area. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature C7, by directing the release direction of the game ball toward the predetermined area at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guide means at the release position will reach the ball entry part.

Feature C8. At a position on the way to the predetermined area where the game ball released from the guide means, there is a course adjusting means (electrically operated The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that a nail 560) is provided.

According to feature C8, a part of the game balls released from the guiding means toward the predetermined area will deviate from the predetermined area. By setting whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters a predetermined area as an uncertain element, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the players' interests. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C9. The course adjustment means includes:
A change execution means (electric nail 560) that changes the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
moving the change execution means so that the game ball released from the guide means comes into contact with the change execution means; and changing the game ball so that the game ball released from the guide means does not come into contact with the change execution means. a course adjustment drive means (nail drive section 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C9, the volume occupied by the course adjustment means can be reduced by having a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward a predetermined area and a state in which it cannot flow down toward a predetermined area by moving the change execution means. This can increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature C10. The guiding means is
means for ejecting the game balls so that the ejected game balls come into contact with the path adjustment means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243);
means (fourth support surface 244) for ejecting the game ball so that the ejected game ball does not come into contact with the path adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to feature C8 or C9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C10, by configuring the guiding means to emit game balls in a plurality of ways, some game balls are emitted from the guiding means and enter a predetermined area, and others do not enter the predetermined area. I can do it. In addition, in the guiding means, by setting the rate of occurrence of the discharge mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means and the release mode in which the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means to occur, the game ball released from the guide means It is possible to make the percentage of balls that enter the ball and the percentage of balls that do not enter the ball close to the ratio set at the design stage.

Feature C11. The guiding means releases the game ball toward the predetermined area,
Features C1 to 3 are characterized in that the predetermined area is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PA) at a position that is more than a diameter of the gaming ball from a position where the guiding means starts releasing the gaming ball. The gaming machine according to any one of C10.

According to feature C11, the game ball can pass between the position where the guiding means starts releasing the game ball and the predetermined area. For this reason, there remains a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means may not enter the predetermined area. By setting whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters a predetermined area as an uncertain element, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the players' interests. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C12. The predetermined area is a ball entry area in which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter, and one of the conditions for awarding a benefit is satisfied by the game ball entering the ball. (first through gate 35, first operating port 33,581) is provided,
The guide means causes the game ball to reach the ball entry part by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The ball entry section is characterized by having an opening that is inclined substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball discharged from the guide means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry section at the height position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11.

According to feature C12, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that is released from the guiding means and reaches the ball entry portion will enter the ball entry portion without contacting the edge of the ball entry portion. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball ejected from the guiding means collides with the edge of the ball entry part, causing the ball entry timing to shift or coming off the ball entry part.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C12, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group C, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area where game balls flow down, and the game board includes nails and windmills to appropriately disperse the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special winning winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls fired from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while coming into contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, actuation opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are fired. Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Equipped with a guiding means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581),
The guiding means is
an intake opening (intake port 262) that allows the game balls flowing down toward the guiding means to enter the inside of the guiding means;
an opening partition means (upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) partitioning the intake opening;
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340) that is rotatable and includes a conveying means (step surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) for conveying the game balls taken into the guiding means inside the guiding means. )and,
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive section 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
The game ball is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the intake opening, the game ball deforms and A deformation means (upper right standing wall 252, blade member 343, rotation shafts 254, 344) that makes it possible to release the force that tries to pinch the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, by deforming the deformation means around the intake opening, the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area while avoiding the situation where the game ball is caught between the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and stopped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the game ball being caught, or from having to take troubleshooting measures to remove the caught game ball.

Feature D2. The deforming means includes means (upper right standing wall 252, rotation shaft 254) that makes it possible to release the force applied to the opening dividing means by temporarily displacing the opening dividing means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature D1.

According to feature D2, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening dividing means, and the game ball is pushed toward the opening dividing means as the rotating means rotates, the opening By temporarily displacing the partitioning means to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught and stopped.

Feature D3. The deformation means includes means (blade member 343, rotation shaft 344) that makes it possible to release the force applied to the rotation means by temporarily displacing a part of the rotation means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to feature D3, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening dividing means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening dividing means as the rotating means rotates. In addition, by temporarily displacing a part of the rotating means to a specific position and releasing the force that pinches the game ball, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught and stopped.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D3, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature group D described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area where game balls flow down, and the game board includes nails and windmills to appropriately disperse the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special winning winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls fired from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while coming into contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, actuation opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are fired. Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a ball entrance part (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry section;
Equipped with
The guide means includes a discharge means (discharge port 256, 621) for discharging the game ball toward the ball entry section,
A game machine characterized in that the ball entry part is provided at a position away from the ejection means by a diameter or more of the game ball.

According to feature E1, the game ball ejected from the ejection means needs to flow down a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball before entering the ball entry section. Therefore, depending on the direction and speed of release of the game ball ejected from the ejection means, the game ball may enter the ball entry section or may not enter the ball entry section. If all of the game balls ejected from the ejection means enter the ball entry section, the player may lose interest in the whereabouts of the game balls after they are released. On the other hand, by making it an uncertain factor whether or not the game ball ejected from the ejection means will enter the ball entry section, the player's attention is drawn to the whereabouts of the game ball after it is released, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of children.

Feature E2. The guiding means is
A rotating means (rotating body) that is rotatable and includes a taking means (recesses 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and blade members 343) that can take and hold a game ball in the guiding means. 183,230,340,440) and
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) that transports the game ball taken into the guide means by rotating the rotation means;
Drop prevention means (left Standing wall 181h, right side standing wall 181d),
It is equipped with
The release means includes a release opening (discharge port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the game ball being conveyed while being in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guide means. 621) The gaming machine according to feature E1.

According to feature E2, the game ball is transported while in contact with the fall prevention means, and when it reaches the release opening, it is released toward the outside of the guiding means. Since the position of the discharge opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same every time. Further, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature E3. The game machine according to feature E2, wherein the discharge opening is configured such that, at an edge of the discharge opening, the discharge direction of the game ball discharged from the discharge opening is directed toward the ball entry part.

According to feature E3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it comes into contact with the edge of the release opening and is thereby released toward the ball entry portion. By fixing the position where the game ball is released from the guide means and the direction in which it is released, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guide means will reach the ball entry part.

Feature E4. The ejection means includes a direction changing means (ejection protrusion 181e, The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that it is provided with a discharge protruding end 263a).

According to feature E4, the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction in which the game ball is released, so that the game ball can change the release position without being released from the release means. You can prevent them from passing by.

Feature E5. The direction changing means protrudes to a midway position in the front and back direction of the game area in a manner that it can come into contact with the game ball guided by the rotating means,
The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoidance means (collision avoidance groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to feature E5, the moving direction of the game ball is changed at the release position by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without interfering with the rotation of the rotating means, thereby promoting release of the game ball. be able to.

Feature E6. Feature E4 or The gaming machine described in E5.

According to feature E6, by directing the release direction of the game ball toward the ball entry part at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means will reach the ball entry part at the release position. .

Feature E7. The ejection means includes a direction regulating means (guidance passage 545) for regulating the ejection direction of the game ball toward the ball entry part,
The guiding means is located upstream of the direction determining means in the direction of flow of the game ball, and when in the open state, allows the game ball to enter the direction determining means, and is in the closed state. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, further comprising an opening/closing means (adjusting section 546) that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the game ball.

According to feature E7, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be suppressed by using a simple guiding means composed of the direction defining means and the opening/closing means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of options for arranging the guide means in the game area, and to increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature E8. In the gaming area, a game ball ejected from the ejecting means is placed at a position on the way to the ball entry section, in which case the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the ball entry section, and in a case where the game ball is not allowed to flow down. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that a certain course adjustment means (electric nail 560) is provided.

According to feature E8, a part of the game ball ejected from the ejection means toward the ball entry part comes off from the ball entry part. By providing a path adjustment means that causes both cases in which the game ball ejected from the ejection means enters the ball entry section and cases in which the ball does not enter the ball entry section, the game ball ejected from the ejection means can be made to enter the ball entry section. Whether or not the ball will enter the ball can be an uncertain element.

Feature E9. The course adjustment means includes:
A change execution means (electric nail 560) that changes the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
moving the change execution means so that the game ball ejected from the ejection means comes into contact with the change execution means; and changing the change execution means so that the game ball ejected from the ejection means does not come into contact with the change execution means. a course adjustment drive means (nail drive section 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature E8, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E9, the volume occupied by the path adjustment means can be reduced by having a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the ball entry section and a state in which it cannot flow down toward the ball entry section by moving the change execution means. It is possible to suppress this and increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature E10. The release means is
means for ejecting the game balls so that the ejected game balls come into contact with the path adjustment means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243);
means (fourth support surface 244) for ejecting the game ball so that the ejected game ball does not come into contact with the path adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to feature E8 or E9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E10, by configuring the ejection means to eject game balls in a plurality of ways, both game balls ejected from the ejection means and entering the ball entry section and game balls that do not enter the ball entry section. can be caused. In addition, in the ejection means, by making the ratio of the ejection mode in which the ejected game ball comes into contact with the course adjusting means and the ejection mode in which it does not come into contact occur constant, the game ball ejected from the ejection means can enter the ball. It is possible to make the percentage of balls that enter the zone and the percentage of balls that do not enter the zone close to the percentage set at the design stage.

Feature E11. The ejection means causes the game ball to reach the ball entry portion by ejecting the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The ball entry section is characterized by having an opening that is inclined substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball discharged from the ejection means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry section at the height position. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

According to feature E11, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that is ejected from the ejection means and reaches the ball entry portion will enter the ball entry portion without contacting the edge of the ball entry portion. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball ejected from the ejection means collides with the edge of the ball entry portion, causing the ball entry timing to shift or coming off the ball entry portion.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E11, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area where game balls flow down, and the game board includes nails and windmills to appropriately disperse the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special winning winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls fired from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while coming into contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, actuation opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are fired. Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
Specific memory execution means (for executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63), which stores information corresponding to the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the specific storage means (main RAM 65); function) and
A benefit that executes processing for granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. A granting means (a function of executing the process of step S219 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the sixteenth embodiment). In the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (the first - Predetermined storage execution means (first - In the fifteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the history setting process in the main side CPU 63, step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S2920 and step S2923.

According to feature F1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a benefit is granted to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of game balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of ball entry is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined information does not serve as an opportunity to execute a process for awarding a benefit to a player.

According to feature F2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means by not allowing the predetermined information to trigger execution of processing for granting benefits to players. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature F3. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and prevents the game ball from entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information that allows the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and information on the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature F4. All ball entry means for ejecting entered game balls from the gaming area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are subject to storage in the predetermined storage means of information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is a ball entering means.

According to feature F4, all the ball entry means for ejecting game balls from the gaming area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means can be controlled. can be managed using information stored in a predetermined storage means. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to the number of game balls ejected from the gaming area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature F5, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, by using the predetermined information, it is possible to insert the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It becomes possible to understand the ball entry history in detail.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature F6, since the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the manner in which the game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means can be controlled while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. management.

Feature F7. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined situation. In the first to thirteenth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1404 and S1409, in the fourteenth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2704, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the management The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2803 in the side CPU 112.

According to feature F7, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation and to manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature F8. Any of the features F1 to F7 characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature F8, it is possible to read information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze how the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature F9. Equipped with a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the external output unit outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit.

According to feature F9, it becomes possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. Means (main unit) for specifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output section, and for outputting information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature F9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the side CPU 63.

According to feature F10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is outputted to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be outputted to the outside is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is outputted to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature F11. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F11, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load on the first control means is extremely increased. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing this from occurring.

Feature F12. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature F13. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding thereto when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, thereby preventing the game from being played to the specific ball entering means. Specific information that allows the number of balls entered or the frequency of balls entered by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, history information, fifteenth to In the seventeenth embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means for transmitting first information to the second control means by using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means (first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63). function to output either) and
A second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature F11 or F12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. Second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature F14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and the opening/closing execution mode in the main CPU 63 in the eighth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature F13, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of outputting any one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode medium signal, and a door open signal.

According to feature F14, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. In addition, since the identifying information that makes it possible to identify whether or not it is a predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the identifying information is transmitted to the first information and the second control means by the second control means. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing this information from other information such as 2 information.

Feature F15. The first control means transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature F13 or F14, further comprising an identification information transmitting means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature F15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to a specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to previously store the correspondence between these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F16. The gaming machine according to feature F15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature F16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means. Become.

Feature F17. According to feature F15 or F16, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature F17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature F18. When receiving the identification information, the second control means is capable of specifying that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. Any one of the features F15 to F17, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence relationship information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature F18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. This provides the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature F19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and the opening/closing execution mode in the main CPU 63 in the eighth embodiment) Equipped with a function to output any of the following: medium signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal).
Feature F15, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of F18 to F18.

According to feature F19, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F20. The second control means, as a receiving section capable of receiving information from the first control means, has a receiver that is capable of receiving information from the first control means, and has a receiver that is capable of receiving information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to feature F20, since the second control means is provided with a number of receiving sections greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to Even if the number of types of information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the receiving section. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F21. A first external output means (management) for outputting information on a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that the predetermined ball entry means corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means to a device external to the gaming machine. (a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management) for outputting information on a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specific ball entering means to a device external to the gaming machine. (a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine how the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and how the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. It becomes possible to specify the manner in which the ball enters the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, a combination of predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specified ball entry method is output to the outside, as well as specific information and correspondence to the specific ball entry method. Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize what is being done is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature F22. information calculation means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, and In the 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617, and in the ninth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S2017. In the tenth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112, in the eleventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2402 in the management CPU 112, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2202 in the management CPU 112 As described in any one of the features F1 to F21, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S2605 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. gaming machines.

According to feature F22, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Feature F23. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means (a first - In the 13th embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1404 and step S1409 in the management side CPU 112, in the 14th embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112, and in the 15th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2704 on the management side a function of executing the process of step S2803 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is a means (first to seventh, In the 8th, 12th, 14th, 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, A function to execute the processing in steps S2008, S2013, and S2017, a function to execute the processing in step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing in step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and in the seventeenth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S3203 in the main side CPU 63). The gaming machine described in feature F22.

According to the feature F23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether it is a predetermined situation or not.

Feature F24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, Feature F22 or F23 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management CPU 112 in the 18th embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management CPU 112 in the 12th embodiment. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature F24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature F25. Feature F22 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in F23.

According to feature F25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read and the game ball entered. When analyzing a mode, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature F26. The information calculation means, when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F25, characterized in that the mode information is calculated.

According to feature F26, mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, so the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature F27. Features F22 to F22 are characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of F26.

According to feature F27, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature F28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F27.

According to feature F28, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time passes, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature F29. Features F22 to F28 characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature F29, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature F30. The gaming machine according to feature F29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature F30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature F31. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature F29 or The gaming machine described in F30.

According to feature F31, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F32. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, step S2010, step S2014 and step S2018 in the management CPU 112) sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631) (in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature F32, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of types of information at once when managing the game ball entering manner.

Feature F33. The result storage execution means includes:
A means for determining whether the aspect information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112);
means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature F32, comprising:

According to feature F33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature F34. The game according to feature F32 or F33, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature F34, information that makes it possible to specify when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature F35. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features F22 to F34, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature F35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature F36. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S3205, step S3207, and step S3208 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F35.

According to feature F36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for the game hall manager and the like to grasp the management result of the game ball entering manner without having to read the manner information from the gaming machine.

Feature F37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature F36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature F37, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature F38. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F36 or F37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature F38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature F39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features F36 to F38, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature F39, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is notified. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature F40. Features F1 to F1 are characterized in that the game ball includes means for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means (a function for executing the process of step S220 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of F39.

According to feature F40, in a configuration in which when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is outputted to the outside, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, you can easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means and the frequency of entry, and by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of ball entry.

Feature F41. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature F41, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F41, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; in the sixteenth embodiment, the main side CPU 63) (a function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923);
Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 18th In the embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617, and in the twelfth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S2017. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the process of step S2605 in the management CPU 112. (in the 17th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to perform processing corresponding to the results of a game in a predetermined period on the gaming machine itself, or it is possible to externally output mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature G2. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined event has occurred in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (in the first to thirteenth embodiments). In the 14th embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1204 and S1209, and in the 15th embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2803. functions),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the aspect information (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, and In the 14th, 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617, and in the 12th embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S1617. A function to execute the process in step S2017, a function to execute the process in step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment. In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature G1 is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. .

According to feature G2, it is possible to distinguish whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not, and calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature G3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, Feature G1 or G2 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management CPU 112 in the 18th embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management CPU 112 in the 12th embodiment. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature G3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature G4. Feature G1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information remains stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

According to feature G4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the results of , it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information on which the aspect information was calculated.

Feature G5. Feature G1 characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of G4 to G4.

According to feature G5, the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature G6. Any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger that can repeatedly occur occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature G6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature G7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

According to feature G7, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time passes, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature G8. Features G1 to G7 characterized by comprising an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature G8, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature G9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information can be output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature G10. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature G8 characterized in that the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine described in G9.

According to feature G10, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature G11. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, step S2010, step S2014 and step S2018 in the management CPU 112) sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631) (in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature G11, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature G12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the form information in the calculation result storage means when the form information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature G11.

According to feature G12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature G13. The game according to feature G11 or G12, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature G13, information that makes it possible to specify when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature G14. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features G1 to G13, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature G14, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature G15. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S3205, step S3207, and step S3208 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14.

According to feature G15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for a game hall manager or the like to grasp the gaming management results for a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature G16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature G16, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature G17. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature G17, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature G18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature G18, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature G19. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the entry is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the sixteenth embodiment). (in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the sixteenth embodiment) A function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the main CPU 63),
information calculation means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, and In the 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617, and in the 12th embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S2017. In the tenth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112, in the eleventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2402 in the management CPU 112, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2202 in the management CPU 112 A function of executing the process of step S2605 in the side CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Feature G20. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature G20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G20, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; in the sixteenth embodiment, the main side CPU 63) (a function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923);
Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th , in the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing steps S2008 and S2013 in the management CPU 112. and a function of executing the process of step S2017, a function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment),
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, step S2010, step S2014 and step S2018 in the management CPU 112) sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631) (in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to perform processing corresponding to the results of a game in a predetermined period on the gaming machine itself, or it is possible to externally output mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Further, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature H2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the form information in the calculation result storage means when the form information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to feature H2, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature H3. The game according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature H3, information that makes it possible to specify when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature H4. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined event has occurred in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (in the first to thirteenth embodiments). In the 14th embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1204 and S1209, and in the 15th embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2803. functions),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the aspect information (first to seventh, eighth, tenth, third). In the 14th, 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S2013 in the management CPU 112. A function to execute the process in step S2017, a function to execute the process in step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment. Any one of the features H1 to H3 is characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature H4, it is possible to distinguish whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not, and to calculate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period.

Feature H5. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, Features H1 to H4 are provided with a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management CPU 112 in the 18th embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management CPU 112 in the 12th embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature H5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature H6. Feature H1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used in calculating the aspect information remains stored in the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of H5.

According to feature H6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the results of , it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information on which the aspect information was calculated.

Feature H7. Feature H1 characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of H6 to H6.

According to feature H7, the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature H8. Any one of features H1 to H7, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation trigger that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature H8, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature H9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8.

According to feature H9, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time passes, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature H10. Features H1 to H9 characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature H10, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature H11. The gaming machine according to feature H10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature H11, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information can be output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature H12. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature H10 or The gaming machine described in H11.

According to feature H12, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature H13. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features H1 to H12, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature H13, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature H14. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S3205, step S3207, and step S3208 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H13.

According to feature H14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for a game hall manager or the like to grasp the gaming management results for a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature H15. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature H14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature H15, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature H16. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H14 or H15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature H16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature H17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features H14 to H16, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature H17, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is notified. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature H18. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the entry is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the sixteenth embodiment). (in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the sixteenth embodiment) A function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the main CPU 63),
Information calculation means (first to first In the 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management CPU 112, and in the 11th embodiment, A function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the CPU 112, a function of executing steps S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and a function of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. (in the 13th embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112; in the 17th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S3203 in the main side CPU 63),
Result storage execution means (steps S2010, S2014, and S2018 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). (in the thirteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H18, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Further, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature H19. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature H19, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H19, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. First storage execution means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112; in the sixteenth embodiment, the main side) a function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the CPU 63);
When a specific event occurs as a result of a game, storage of information corresponding to the specific event is executed in the predetermined storage means, so that specific information (in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, history information, A second storage execution means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments) that stores the numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments in the predetermined storage means. (a function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the 16th embodiment); ,
a first external output means (management side CPU 112 function to execute external output processing),
a second external output means (management side CPU 112 function to execute external output processing),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine, and use the read information to specify the manner in which the predetermined event occurs and the manner in which the specific event occurs. In addition, when the external output is performed, the specified information is outputted externally in such a way that it is possible to recognize that the specified information corresponds to the specified event, and the specified information is outputted externally in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specified information corresponds to the specified event. The specific information is outputted to the outside in such a way that it can be recognized. Thereby, even if the second control means does not process the information, it is possible to specify the manner in which each event occurs using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs (a function of executing the process of step S220 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature I2, in a configuration in which when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is output to the outside, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, and the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be accurately determined by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to understand the

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature I3, the predetermined information is count information of the number of times a predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times a specific event has occurred. It becomes possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs.

Feature I4. Equipped with a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The first external output means and the second external output means output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine by using the information output section. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to feature I4, it becomes possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output section for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I5. Selection means ( The gaming machine according to feature I4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature I5, in a configuration in which information stored in a predetermined storage means is output to the outside using an information output unit for outputting a control program to the outside, the information to be outputted to the outside includes the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is outputted to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature I6. The selection means determines whether information to be output from the information output section is based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section, information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that it specifies which of the two.

According to feature I6, which information is to be output from the information output section is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature I7. A chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that stores the control program in advance has the information output section, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I6.

According to feature I7, it is possible to consolidate signal paths for the information output section within the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I7, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
an information output unit (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, special information can be output to the outside by using the information output section for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature J2. Selection means (step S1502 in the main CPU 63) that specifies which of the special information and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and outputs information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature J2, in a configuration in which special information is externally output using an information output unit for externally outputting a control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. The player is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature J3. The selection means determines which of the special information and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature J2, characterized in that:

According to feature J3, which information is to be output from the information output section is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature J4. Any one of features J1 to J3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) that stores the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature J4, it is possible to consolidate signal paths for the information output section within the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Comprising a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means includes:
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the process of step S219 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92) for granting a benefit to the player when a predetermined event occurs;
Information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means stores information corresponding to the predetermined event information when it receives the predetermined event information. In the embodiment, the predetermined information (1st to 14th , history information in the 18th embodiment, numerical information measured by a counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means (first to fifteenth , in the 17th to 18th embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the 16th embodiment, the function of executing the history setting process in the main side CPU 63. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2923.

According to feature K1, a bonus is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine. The predetermined information will be stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load on the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature K2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature K3. The predetermined storage execution means stores the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the gaming machine or external to the gaming machine by executing storage processing of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage unit when the specific event occurs. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. so that
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means for transmitting first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
a second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs; )and,
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which a predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which a specific event occurs. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. transmitted to the second control means. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature K4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and the opening/closing execution mode in the main CPU 63 in the sixth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature K3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of outputting any one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal.

According to feature K4, it is possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. In addition, since the identifying information that makes it possible to identify whether or not it is a predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the identifying information is transmitted to the first information and the second control means by the second control means. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing this information from other information such as 2 information.

Feature K5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature K3 or K4, further comprising a transmitting means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature K5, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means; There is no need to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature K6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the predetermined event and the specific event may occur. Under certain circumstances, it becomes possible for the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means.

Feature K7. According to feature K5 or K6, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature K7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature K8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means provides correspondence relationship information that enables it to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. according to any one of features K5 to K7, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). Game machine.

According to feature K8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. This provides the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature K9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and the opening/closing execution mode in the main CPU 63 in the sixth embodiment) Equipped with a function to output any of the following: medium signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal).
Feature K5, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of K8 to K8.

According to feature K9, it is possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature K10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K10, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A first control means (main CPU 63);
a second control means (management CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs (a function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
A second transmitting means that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs (a function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
Identification information transmitting means (main side a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Furthermore, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information There is no need to store the correspondence relationship in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature L2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means. Become.

Feature L3. According to feature L1 or L2, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature L3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature L4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of features L1 to L3 is characterized in that it includes a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing the relationship information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). The game machine described.

According to feature L4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. This makes it necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature L5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and the opening/closing execution mode in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) Equipped with a function to output any of the following: medium signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal).
Feature L1, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of L4 to L4.

According to feature L5, it is possible to manage the manner in which the first event occurs and the manner in which the second event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature L6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, a number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to feature L6, the number of signal paths that is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided, so that the information can be transmitted depending on the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, this can be handled without changing the configuration regarding the signal path. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature L7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L7, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature K group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding communication, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

10...Pachinko machine, 24...Game board, 24a...Out port, 24b...Nail, 27...Game ball firing mechanism, 31...General prize opening, 32...Special electric prize winning device, 33...First operating port, 34...Second operation Mouth, 34a...General electric utility, 35...First through gate, 39...Second through gate, 61...Main control board, 62...MPU, 63...Main side CPU, 65...Main side RAM, 92...Payout side CPU , 102... Reading terminal, 112... Management side CPU, 116... Correspondence memory, 171... Passage entrance, 172... Escape passage, 173... Passage exit, 174... Exit roof, 180... Adjustment mechanism, 181c... Left standing wall , 181d... Right standing wall, 181e... Discharge protrusion, 181g... Right side for discharging, 181h... Left standing wall, 183... Rotating body, 183b to 183e... Recessed part, 184... Adjustment drive unit, 185... Intake Mouth, 188-191...Blade portion, 188a-191a...Surrounding surface, 188b-191b...Front surface, 192...Collision avoidance groove, 220...Adjustment mechanism, 230...Rotating body, 241-244...Supporting surface, 241a-244a... Step surface, 252... Upper right standing wall, 254... Rotating shaft, 256... Discharge port, 261... Left standing wall, 262... Intake port, 263a... Projecting end for discharge, 291... Left side guide nail, 292... Right side guide nail , 330...adjustment mechanism, 340...rotating body, 343...blade member, 344...rotating shaft, 352...standing wall, 371...downstream guide nail, 430...adjusting mechanism, 440...rotating body, 472...guide nail, 530... Adjustment mechanism, 545... Guide path, 546... Adjustment section, 560... Electric nail, 560a... Nail drive section, 581... First operation port, 610... Game board, 620... Adjustment mechanism, 621... Discharge port, 631... Calculation Result memory, 651...Light emitting unit for notification, PA...Game area, C4...General utility object release counter, C5...Initial value counter for release, T1...Low frequency winning determination value table.

Claims (1)

a gaming value imparting means that is electrically connected to a predetermined detection means and executes processing for imparting a gaming value to a game;
processing execution means that is electrically connected to the gaming value imparting means and executes a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information that is information used in the processing for imparting the gaming value and is referred to in response to the detection by the predetermined detection means;
Reference information stored in the first reference information storage means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before execution of a predetermined process for advancing the game is started. first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the processing execution means;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means to the processing execution means;
means for waiting for the processing to proceed until a predetermined period has elapsed after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine has started;
Equipped with
The processing execution means includes:
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the gaming value assigning means;
Execution means for executing the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
processing result information storage means for storing processing result information that is information regarding the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means;
Equipped with
The game value imparting means is a main control means that controls the progress of the game,
The processing execution means is an effect control means that controls execution of an effect,
The first transmitting means transmits the reference information signal to the processing execution means after the predetermined period has elapsed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined control for transmitting the predetermined information signal by the second transmitting means is not executed when a predetermined event that stops game progress control occurs.

Images